User's Manual

Add to my manuals
350 Pages

advertisement

User's Manual | Manualzz

Acuvim II Series Power Meter

User's Manual

Copyright

©

2014 V2.02

This manual may not be altered or reproduced in whole or in part by any means without the expressed written consent of Accuenergy.

The information contained in this document is believed to be accurate at the time of publication, however, Accuenergy assumes no responsibility for any errors which may appear here and reserves the right to make changes without notice. Please ask the local representative for latest product specifications before ordering.

[ Document #1040E2202 Revision Date: Feb., 2014 ]

I

Please read this manual carefully before installation, operation and maintenance of

Acuvim II series meter.

The following symbols in this manual and on Acuvim II series meters are used to provide warning of danger or risk during the installation and operation of the meters.

Electric Shock Symbol: Carries information about procedures which must be followed to reduce the risk of electric shock and danger to personal health.

Safety Alert Symbol: Carries information about circumstances which if not considered may result in injury or death.

This mark indicates that this product is UL listed.

Installation and maintenance of the Acuvim II series meter should only be performed by qualified, competent professionals who have received training and should have experience with high voltage and current devices.

Accuenergy shall not be responsible or liable for any damages caused by improper meter installation and/or operation.

II

Content

Chapter 1 Introduction-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1

1.1 Meter Overview---------------------------------------------------------------------------2

1.2 Areas of Application---------------------------------------------------------------------4

1.3 Functionality------------------------------------------------------------------------------4

Chapter 2 Installation---------------------------------------------------------------------------------9

2.1 Appearance and Dimensions-------------------------------------------------------12

2.2 Installation Methods-------------------------------------------------------------------14

2.3 Wiring--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16

2.3.1 Terminal Strips------------------------------------------------------------------ 16

2.3.2 Power Requirement------------------------------------------------------------17

2.3.3 Voltage Input Wiring-----------------------------------------------------------20

2.3.4 Current Input Wiring-----------------------------------------------------------22

2.3.5 Frequently Used Wiring Methods------------------------------------------24

2.3.6 Communication----------------------------------------------------------------28

Chapter 3 Meter Display and Parameter Settings--------------------------------------------29

3.1 Display Panel and Keys----------------------------------------------------------------30

3.2 Metering Data--------------------------------------------------------------------------33

3.3 Statistics Data---------------------------------------------------------------------------38

3.4 Demand Data----------------------------------------------------------------------------40

3.5 Harmonic Data--------------------------------------------------------------------------40

3.6 Expanded I/O Module Data----------------------------------------------------------43

3.7 Parameter Settings Mode------------------------------------------------------------47

3.8 Page Recovery Function--------------------------------------------------------------62

Chapter 4 Detailed Functions and Software---------------------------------------------------63

4.1 Basic Analog Measurements--------------------------------------------------------64

4.2 Max/Min----------------------------------------------------------------------------------68

III

4.3 Harmonics and Power Quality Analysis-----------------------------------------68

4.4 Over/Under Limit Alarming----------------------------------------------------------69

4.5 Data Logging----------------------------------------------------------------------------77

4.6 Time of Use (TOU)----------------------------------------------------------------------83

4.7 Power Quality Event Logging and Waveform Capture------------------------89

4.8 Seal Function---------------------------------------------------------------------------100

Chapter 5 Extended Modules -------------------------------------------------------------------107

5.1 IO Modules------------------------------------------------------------------------------108

5.2 Ethernet Module (AXM-NET) ------------------------------------------------------139

5.3 ProfiBus Module (AXM-PROI)------------------------------------------------------188

5.4 RS485 Module (AXM-RS485)-------------------------------------------------------205

5.5 BACnetModule(AXM-BACnet) ----------------------------------------------------210

Chapter 6 Communication-----------------------------------------------------------------------237

6.1 Modbus Protocol Introduction-------------------------------------------238

6.2 Communication Format--------------------------------------------------241

6.3 Data Address Table and Application Details---------------------------246

6.3.1 System Parameter Setting--------------------------------------------------248

6.3.2 System Status Parameter------------------------------------------------250

6.3.3 Date and Time Table------------------------------------------------------253

6.3.4 Over/Under Limit Alarming Setting-----------------------------------253

6.3.5 I/O Modules Settings----------------------------------------------------256

6.3.6 Metering Parameter Address Table----------------------------------262

6.3.7 Data Logging----------------------------------------------------------------277

6.3.8 Time of Use TOU-------------------------------------------------------------- 285

6.4 DNP3.0 Protocol Introduction-----------------------------------------------------313

Appedix-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------331

Appendix A Technical data and specifications--------------------------------332

Appendix B Ordering Information--------------------------------------------------337

Appendix C Revision History-----------------------------------------------------------340

IV

Starting!

Congratulations!

You have purchased an advanced, versatile, multifunction power meter. This meter can work as a remote terminal unit (RTU) that contributes to your system's stability and reliability by providing real-time power quality monitoring and analysis.

When you open the package, you will find the following items

1. Acuvim II series meter 1

2. Terminal Blocks 3

4. Rubber Gasket 1

5. Product Disk (Manual, Warranty, Software) 1

6. Additional documentation(Quick Setup Guide, Calibration Certificate) 2

To avoid complications, please read this manual carefully before installation and operation of the Acuvim II series meter.

Chapter 1 Introduction

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring

Chapter 3 Meter Display and Parameter Settings

Chapter 4 Detailed Functions and Software

Chapter 5 Extended Modules

Chapter 6 Communication

Appendix Technical Data, Specifications and Ordering Information

V

VI

Chapter 1 Introduction

1.1 Meter Overview

1.2 Areas of Application

1.3 Functionality

1.1 Meter Overview

Powerful Multifunction Power Meter

The Acuvim II series multifunction digital power meter is designed using modern MCU and DSP technology. It integrates three-phase energy measuring and displaying, energy accumulating, power quality analysis, malfunction alarming, data logging and network communication. A vivid LCD display with large characters and, time of use programmable backlight provides a clear realtime data readout.

An Ideal for Electric Automation SCADA Systems

The Acuvim II series meter is the ideal choice for replacing traditional, analog electric meters. In additon to providing clear real-time readings on the meter front, it can also be used as a remote terminal unit (RTU) for monitoring and controlling for a SCADA system. Users can access all measurement parameters via the standard RS485 communication port (or the optional Ethernet port) with the Modbus

TM

protocol.

Energy Management

The Acuvim II series meter is able to measure bidirectional, four quadrants kWh and kvarh. It provides maximum/minimum records for power usage and power demand parameters. All power and energy parameters can be viewed remotely via software in order to easily monitor various parameters. In addition, measurement tables can be viewed from the free Acuview software.

Remote Power Control

This meter is designed for measuring and monitoring power quality parameters.

Since different I/O modules can be added to the meter, this expands the capabilities and provides a very flexible platform for using the meter as a distributed RTU, for metering, monitoring and remote controlling, all in one unit.

2

Power Quality Analysis

Utilizing digital signal processing (DSP) technology, the Acuvim II series meter provides high accuracy power quality analysis and supports remote monitoring via the Ethernet module. The meter continuously updates metering results and allows users to access the meter online to monitor parameters such as voltage and current THD, harmonics, voltage crest factor, current K factor, and voltage and current unbalance factor etc.

Data Logging

The Acuvim IIR/IIE/IIW meter contains 8 megabytes ,IIW contains 8 megabytes of onboard memory for data logging and historical trending. Since the meter contains a real-time clock, all events and logged data will be time stamped.

Time of use (TOU-Acuvim IIE)

User can assign up to 4 different tariffs (sharp, peak, valley and normal) to different time period within a day according to the billing requirements. The meter will calculate and accumulate energy to different tariffs according to the meter’s internal clock timing and TOU settings.

Power Quality Event Logging

When a power quality event happens, such as voltage sag and swell, etc, Acuvim

IIW will record the timestamp and the triggering condition of the event. It can save up to 50, 000 power quality events.

Waveform Capture

Acuvim IIW can record 100 groups of voltage and current waveforms. It logs at

64 points per cycle. It provides the waveform record of 10 cycles before and after the triggering point. It also supports a settable triggering condition.

3

1.2 Areas of Application

Power Distribution Automation Electric Switch Gear and Control Panels

Energy Management Systems Marine Applications

Renewable Energy

1.3 Functionality

Multifunction

Acuvim II meters provide powerful data collecting and processing functions. In additon to measuring various parameters, the meter is able to perform demand metering, harmonic analysis, max/min statistic recording, over/under limit alarming, energy accumulating and data logging.

High Accuracy

Accuracy of Voltage and Current is 0.2%, True-RMS.

Accuracy of Power and Energy is 0.2%, while monitoring all four quadrants.

Compact and Easy to Install

This meter can be installed into a standard ANSI C39.1 (4” Round) or an IEC

92mm DIN (Square) cut out. With the 51mm depth after mounting, the Acuvim

II series meter can be installed in a small cabinet. Mounting clips are used for easy installation and removal.

Easy to Use

All metering data and setting parameters can be accessed by using the front panel keys or via the communication port. Setting parameters are stored in the

EEPROM so that content will be preserved when the meter is powered off.

4

Multiple Wiring Modes

The Acuvim II series meter can be used in high voltage, low voltage, three phase three wires, three phase four wires and single phase systems using different wiring mode settings.

High Safety, High Reliability

Acuvim II series meter was designed according to industrial standards. It can run reliably under high power disturbance conditions. This meter has been fully tested for EMC and safety compliance in accordance with UL and IEC standards.

5

Function Comparison of Acuvim II series Meters

METERING

CATEGORY

REAL TIME

METERING

ENERGY &

DEMAND

ITEM Parameters

Phase Voltage

Line Voltage

Current

Power

Reactive Power

Apparent Power

Power Factor

Frequency

Load Features

V1, V2, V3, Vlnavg

V12, V23, V31, Vllavg

I1, I2, I3, In, Iavg

P1, P2, P3, Psum

Q1, Q2, Q3, Qsum

S1, S2, S3, Ssum

PF1, PF2, PF3, PF

F

Load Features

Four Quadrant PowersFour Quadrant Powers

Energy Ep_imp, Ep_exp, Ep_total, Ep_net

Reactive Energy

Apparent Energy

Eq_imp, Eq_exp, Eq_total, Eq_net

Es

Demand

Dmd_P, Dmd_Q, Dmd_S, Dmd_I1,

Dmd_I2, Dmd_I3

TOU

MONITORING

TIME OF USE Energy/max demand TOU, 4 Tariffs, 12 Seasons, 14

DAYLIGHT SAVING

TIME

Two formats adjust

Month/Day/Hour/Minute; Month/

Week/First few weeks/Hour/Minute

Trigger, Manual, DI change, Sag/

Dips, Swell, Over Current

Voltage Unbalance

Factor

Current Unbalance

Factor

U_unbl

I_unbl

POWER QUALITY

Voltage THD

Current THD

THD_V1,THD_V2,THD_V3, THD_Vavg

THD_I1, THD_I2, THD_I, THD_Iavg

STATISTICS

Individual Harmonics Harmonics 2 nd to 63 st

Voltage Crest Factor Crest Factor

TIF THFF

Current K factor K Factor

MAX with Time Stamp

MIN with Time Stamp

Each phase of V & l;Total of P, Q, S,

PF & F;Demad of P,Q & S;Each phase

THD of V & I;Unbalnce factor of V & I

Acuvim

II

Acuvim

IIR

Acuvim

IIE

Acuvim

IIW

OTHERS

OPTION

MODULE

ALARM

Over/Under Limit

Alarm

V,I,P,Q,S,PF,V_THD & I_THD each phase and total or average;

Unbalance factor of V & I;load type;Analog Input of each channel

POWER QUALITY

EVENT LOGGING SAG/DIPS,SWELL

Voltage

Data Logging

Data Logging 1

Data Logging 2

Data Logging 3

F, V1/2/3/lnavg, V12/23/13/lavg,

I1/2/3/n/avg, P1/2/3/sum, Q1/2/3/ sum, S1/2/3/sum, PF1/2/3, PF, U_ unbl, I_unbl, Load Type, Ep_imp,

Ep_exp, Ep_total, Ep_net, Eq_ imp, Eq_exp, Eq_total, Eq_net, Es,

THD_V1/2/3/avg, THD_I1/2/3/avg,

Harmonics 2 nd

to 63 rd

, Crest Factor,

THFF, K Factor, sequence and phase angles, DI counter, AI, AO, Dmd P/Q/

S, Dmd I1/2/3

ONBOARD

MEMORY SIZE

Memory Bytes

COMMUNICATION

TIME

I/O OPTION

RS485 Port,Half

Duplex,

Optical Isolated

Modbus-RTU/DNP3.0 Protocol

Real Time Clock

Year, Month, Date, Hour, Minute,

Second

Switch Status (DI) Digital Input (Wet)

Power Supply for DI 24 Vdc

Relay Output (RO) NO, Form A

Digital Output (DO) Photo-MOS

Pulse Output (PO) By using DO

Analog Input (AI) 0(4)~20mA, 0(1)~5V

COMMUNICATION

Analog Output (AO) 0(4)~20mA, 0(1)~5V

Ethernet

Profibus-DP

Modbus-TCP, HTTP , SNMP, SMTP,

SNTP

Profibus-DP/V0

The second way

RS485 Module

BACnet

Modbus-RTU Protocol

IP or MS/TP

— 8MB 8MB 16MB

Function; Option; Blank NA

8

Chapter 2 Installation

2.1 Appearance and Dimensions

2.2 Installation Methods

2.3 Wiring

2.3.1 Terminal Strips

2.3.2 Power Requirements

2.3.3 Voltage Input Wiring

2.3.4 Current Input Wiring

2.3.5 Frequently Used Wiring Methods

2.3.6 Communication

Considerations When Installing Meters

Installation of the meter must be performed by qualified personnel only, who follow standard safety precautions through the installation procedures. Those personnel should have appropriate training and experience with high voltage devices. Appropriate safety gloves, safety glasses and protective clothing are recommended.

During normal operation, dangerous voltage may flow through many parts of the meter, including terminals, and any connected CTs (Current Transformers) and PTs (Potential Transformers), all I/O (Inputs and Outputs) modules and their circuits. All primary and secondary circuits can, at times, produce lethal voltages and currents. AVOID contact with any current-carrying surfaces.

The meter and its I/O output channels are NOT designed as primary protection devices and shall NOT be used as primary circuit protection or in an energylimiting capacity. The meter and its I/O output channels can only be used as secondary protection. AVOID using the meter under situations where failure of the meter may cause injury or death. AVOID using the meter for any application where risk of fire may occur.

All meter terminals should be inaccessible after installation.

Do NOT perform Dielectric (HIPOT) test to any inputs, outputs or communication terminals. High voltage testing may damage electronic components of the meter.

Applying more than the maximum voltage the meter and/or its modules can withstand will permanently damage the meter and/or its modules. Please refer to the specifications for all devices before applying voltages.

10

When removing meter for service, use shorting blocks and fuses for voltage leads and power supply to prevent hazardous voltage conditions or damage to

CTs. CT grounding is optional.

ACCUENERGY recommends using a dry cloth to wipe the meter.

NOTE: IF THE EQUIPMENT IS USED IN A MANNER NOT SPECIFIED

BY THE MANUFACTURER, THE PROTECTION PROVIDED BY THE

EQUIPMENT MAY BE IMPAIRED.

NOTE: THERE IS NO REQUIRED PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE OR

INSPECTION NECESSARY FOR SAFETY. HOWEVER, ANY REPAIR OR

MAINTENANCE SHOULD BE PERFORMED BY THE FACTORY.

DISCONNECT DEVICE: The following part is considered the equipment disconnect device.

A SWITCH OR CIRCUIT-BREAKER SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE INSTALLATION.

THE SWITCH SHALL BE IN CLOSE PROXIMITY TO THE EQUIPMENT AND WITHIN

EASY REACH OF THE OPERATOR. THE SWITCH SHALL BE MARKED AS THE

DISCONNECTING DEVICE FOR THE EQUIPMENT.

11

The installation method is introduced in this chapter. Please read this chapter carefully before beginning installation.

2.1 Appearance and Dimensions

Multifunction Power Meter

Gasket

H P E V/A

96.00 (3.800)

Front View of the Display Meter and Remote Display Unit

96.00 (3.800)

Gasket

7.60 (0.300)

35.90

(1.413)

50.70 (1.996) 12.8

(0.504)

Side View of the

Display Meter

35.90

(1.413)

12.8

(0.504)

Side View of the

Remote Display Unit

35.90

(1.413)

50.70 (1.996)

14.00

(0.551)

Side View of the

DIN rail Meter

12

Unit: mm(inches)

Fig 2-1 Appearance and dimensions of Acuvim II series meter

Part Name

 LCD Display

Table 2-1 Part name of Acuvim II series meter

Description

Large bright white backlight LCD display.

 Front Casing

 Key

Visible portion (for display and control) after mounting onto a panel.

Four keys are used to select display and set.

 Enclosure

The Acuvim II series meter enclosures is made of high strength anti-combustible engineering plastic.

Used for Installation 35mm rail of the DIN rail Meter.

 DIN rail

 Voltage Input Terminals

 Current Input Terminals

Used for voltage input.

Used for current input.

 Power Supply Terminals

Used for control power input

 Communication Terminals

Communication output.

 Interface

Installation Clip

Gasket

Used for link the remote display unit and the DIN rail meter.

Used for fixing the meter to the panel.

Insert the gasket in between the meter and the cutout to cover up gaps from the round hole.

13

2.2 Installation Methods

Environmental

Before installation, please check the environment, temperature and humidity to ensure the Acuvim II series meter is being placed where optimum performance will occur.

Temperature

Operation: -25˚C to 70˚C.

Storage: -40˚C to 85˚C

Humidity

5% to 95% non-condensing.

The Acuvim II series meter should be installed in a dry and dust free environment. Avoid exposing meter to excessive heat, radiation and high electrical noise source.

Installation Steps

The Acuvim II series meter can be installed into a standard ANSI C39.1 (4”

Round) or an IEC 92mm DIN (Square) form.

1. Cut a square hole or round hole on the panel of the switch gear.

The cutting size is shown in fig 2.2.

Unit: mm (inches)

Fig 2-2 Panel Cutout

14

2. Remove the clips from the meter, and insert the meter into the square hole from the front side. Please note: optional rubber gasket must be installed on the meter before inserting the meter into the cut out.

Panel

Panel

Fig 2-3 Put the meter into the opening

3. Install clips on the back side of the meter and secure tightly to ensure the meter is affixed to the panel.

Panel

Fig 2-4 Use the clips to fix the meter on the panel

Note: The display meter and the remote display unit have the same installation method. The DIN rail meter is simply installed on a 35mm DIN rail.

15

2.3 Wiring

2.3.1 Terminal Strips

There are four terminal strips at the back of the Acuvim II series meter. The three phase voltage and current are represented by using 1, 2, and 3 respectively.

These numbers have the same meaning as A, B, and C or R, S, and T used in other literature.

Current Input Terminal Strip

Voltage Input Terminal Strip

16

Fig 2-5 Terminal Strips of Acuvim II series meter

DANGER

O n l y t h e q u a l i f i e d personnel does do the wire connection work. Make sure the power supply is cut off and all the wires are powerless. Failure to observe it may result in severe injury or death.

Safety Earth Connection

Before setting up the meter's wiring, please make sure that the switch gear has an earth ground terminal.

Connect both the meter's and the switch gear's ground terminal together. The following ground terminal symbol is used in this user's manual.

NOTE

Make sure the control p o w e r t e r m i n a l o f the meter ground is connected to the safety

Earth of switchgear.

NOTE

Make sure the voltage of power supply is the same as what the meter needed for its control power.

2.3.2 Power Requirement

Control Power

There are 2 options for the Control Power of the

Acuvim II series meter:

1. Standard: 100~415Vac (50/60Hz) or 100-300Vdc

2. Low Voltage DC Option: 20-60Vdc

The 2 options must be chosen according to the application. Please see the ordering information appendix for further details.

The meter's typical power consumption is very low and can be supplied by an independent source or by the measured load line. A regulator or an uninterrupted power supply (UPS) should be used under high power fluctuation conditions. Terminals for the control power supply are 11, 12 and 13 (L,

N, and Ground). A switch or circuit-breaker shall be included in a building installation. It shall be in close

17

proximity to the equipment, within easy reach of the operator, and shall be marked as the disconnecting device for the equipment.

Fig 2-7 Power supply

A fuse (typical 1A/250Vac) should be used in the auxillary power supply loop.

No. 13 terminal must be connected to the ground terminal of the switchgear.

An isolated transformer or EMC filter should be used in the control power supply loop if there is a power quality problem in the power supply.

NOTE

A filter should be used if there is an EMI problem.

18

Choice of wire of power supply is AWG22-16 or 0.6-1.5mm

2

.

Voltage Input

Maximum input voltage for the Acuvim II series meter shall not exceed

400LN/690LL VAC rms for three phase or 400LN VAC rms for single phase.

Potential Transformer (PT) must be used for high voltage systems. Typical secondary output for PTs shall be 100V or 120V. Please make sure to select an

appropriate PT to maintain the measurement accuracy of the meter. When connecting using the star configuration wiring method, the PT's primary side rated voltage should be equal to or close to the phase voltage of the system to utilize the full range of the PT. When connecting using the delta configuration wiring method, the PT's primary side rated voltage should be equal to or close to the line voltage of the system. A fuse (typical 1A/250Vac) should be used in the voltage input loop. The wire for voltage input is AWG16-12 or 1.3-2.0mm

2

.

Note: In no circumstance should the secondary of the PT be shorted. The secondary of the PT should be grounded at one end. Please refer to the wiring diagram section for further details.

Current Input

Current Transformers (CTs) are required in most engineering applications.

Typical current rating for the secondary side of the CT shall be 5A (standard) or 1A (Optional), please refer to the ordering information appendix for further details. CTs must be used if the system rated current is over 5A. The accuracy of the CT should be better than 0.5% with rating over 3VA is recommended in order to preserve the meter's accuracy. The wire between CTs and the meter shall be as short as possible. The length of the wire have an effect on the accuracy.

The wire size of current input is AWG15-10 or 1.5-2.5mm

2

.

Note: The secondary side of the CT should not be open circuit in any circumstance when the power is on. There should not be any fuse or switch in the CT loop. One end of the CT loop should be connected to the ground.

Vn Connection

Vn is the reference point of the Acuvim II series meter voltage input. Low wire resistance helps improve the measurement accuracy. Different system wiring

19

20 modes require different Vn connection methods. Please refer to the wiring diagram section for more details.

Three Phase Wiring Diagram

This meter can satisfy almost any kind of three phase wiring diagrams. Please read this section carefully before choosing the suitable wiring method for your power system.

Voltage and current input wiring mode can be set separately in the meter parameter setting process. The voltage wiring mode can be set as 3-phase

4-line Wye (3LN), 3-phase 3-line direct connection(3LL), 3-phase 3-line open delta(2LL), single phase 2-line(1LN) and single phase 3-line(1LL) . The current input wiring mode can be set as 3CT, 2CT and 1CT. The voltage mode can be grouped with the current mode as 3LN-3CT (3CT or 2CT, 3LL-3CT, 2LL-3CT, 2LL-

2CT, 1LL-2CT, 1LN-1CT).

2.3.3 Voltage Input Wiring

3-Phase 4-Line Wye Mode (3LN)

The 3-Phase 4-Line wye mode is commonly used in low voltage electric distribution power systems. For voltage lower than 400LN/690LL Vac, power line can be connected directly to the meter's voltage input terminal as shown in fig 2.9a. For high voltage systems (over 400LN/690LL Vac), PTs are required as shown in fig 2.9b. The meter should be set to 3LN for both voltage levels.

Fig 2-9a 3LN direct connection

Fig 2-9b 3LN with 3PT

3-Phase 3-Line Direct Connection Mode (3LL)

In a 3-Phase 3-Line system, power line A, B and C are connected to V1, V2 and

V3 directly. Vn is floated. The voltage input mode of the meter should be set to

3LL.

21

Fig 2-10 3LL 3-Phase 3-Line direct connection

3-Phase 3-Line open Delta Mode (2LL)

Open delta wiring mode is often used in high voltage systems. V2 and Vn are connected together in this mode. The voltage input mode of the meter should be set to 2LL for this voltage input wiring mode.

22

Fig 2-11 2LL with 2PTs

2.3.4 Current Input Wiring

3CT

The 3CT current wiring configuration can be used when either 3CTs are connected (as shown in Fig 2.13) or 2CTs are connected (as shown in Fig 2.14)

to the system. In either case, there is current flowing through all three current terminals.

Fig 2-12 3CTs a

Fig 2-13 3CTs b

2CT

The difference between Fig 2.14 and Fig 2.15 is that no current flows through current input terminal I21 and I22. The meter should be set to the I2 value which is calculated from formula i1+i2+i3=0. The current input mode of the meter should be set to 2CT .

23

1CT

Fig 2-14 2CTs

24

Fig 2-15 1CT

2.3.5 Frequently Used Wiring Method

In this section, the most common voltage and current wiring combinations are shown in different diagrams. In order to display measurement readings correctly, please select the appropriate wiring diagram according your setup and application.

1. 3LN, 3CT with 3 CTs.

2. 3LN, 3CT with 2 CTs

Fig 2-16 3LN, 3CT

Fig 2-17 3LN, 3CT with 2CTs

25

3. 2LL, 3CT

4. 2LL, 2CT

Fig 2-18 2LL, 3CT

26

Fig 2-19 2LL, 2CT

5. 1LN, 1CT(Wiring mode setting 1LN, 1CT)

Fig 2-20 Single phase 2Lines

6. 1LL, 2CT(Wiring mode setting 1LL, 2CT)

Fig 2-21 Single phase 3Lines

27

28

2.3.6 Communication

Acuvim II series meter uses RS485 serial communication and the Modbus-

RTU protocol. The terminals of communication are A, B, and S (14, 15, 16). A is differential signal +, B is differential signal - and S is connected to the shield of the twisted pair cables. Up to 32 devices can be connnected on a RS485 bus.

Use good quality shielded twisted pair cable, AWG22 (0.5mm

2

) or higher. The overall length of the RS485 cable connecting all devices should not exceed

1200m (4000ft). The Acuvim II series meter is used as a slave device of masters such as a PC, PLC, Data Collector or RTU.

If the master does not have RS485 communication port, a converter (such as a

RS232/RS485 or a USB/RS485 converter) will be required. Typical RS485 network topologies include line, circle and star (wye).The shield of each segment of the

RS485 cable must be connected to the ground at one end only.

Every A(+) should be connected to A(+), B(-) to B(-), or it will influence the network, or even damage the communication interface.

The connection topology should avoid “T” type which means there is a new branch and it does not begin from the beginning point.

Keep communication cables away from sources of electrical noise whenever possible.

When using a long communication cable to connect several devices, an anti signal reflecting resistor (typical value 120Ω-300Ω/0.25W) is normally added to the end of the cable beside the last meter if the communication quality is distorted.

Use RS232/RS485 or USB/RS485 converter with optical isolated output and surge protection.

Chapter 3 Meter Display and Parameter Settings

3.1 Display Panel and Keys

3.2 Metering Data

3.3 Statistics Data

3.4 Demand Data

3.5 Harmonic Data

3.6 Expanded I/O Module Data

3.7 Parameter Settings Mode

3.8 Page Recovery Function

Detailed human-machine interface of the meter will be described in this chapter. This includes viewing real-time metering data and setting parameters using different key combination.

3.1 Display Panel and Keys

The front of the Acuvim II series meter consists of an LCD screen and four control keys. All the display segments are illustrated in fig 3.1. Users should note that all the segments will not display in a single page under normal conditions.

1

4

5

6

7

11

12

8

9

10

2

3

17

13 14 15

Fig 3-1 All Display Segments

16

30

SN Display

1

2

Display mode indication

Description

Shows different modes on the display area. “Meter” for real-time measurement; “Max/Min” for statistic data; “Demand” for power demand data; “Harmonic” for harmonic data; “Setting” for parameters setting;

“Digital I/O” for expanded IO module data.

Four lines of “ ” digits in the metering area

Main display area: displays metering data such as voltage, current, power, power factor, frequency, unbalance, phase angle,etc. Displays statistics such as maximum and minimum, demand data, display settings and expanded I/O data.

3 Four “ ” and five “ ” digits

Displays energy data and real-time clock. Also used for the setting mode and digital I/O mode display.

4

5

6

Three “

Load rate

” digits

Unbalance, THD, TDD, MAX, MIN

Item Icons: “U” for voltage; “I” for current; “P” for active power; “Q” for reactive power; “S” for apparent power;

“PF” for power factor; “F” for frequency; “ ” for phase angles; “DMD” for demand; "Mxx" for expanded IO module type; and display setting page number.

Item Icons: “Unbalance” for unbalance of the voltage and current; “THD” for total harmonics distortion;

“ TDD” for total demand distortion; “MAX” for maximum and “MIN” for minimum

Displays the percentage of load current to the nominal current.

Four quadrant icon

: quadrant of the system power

7

8

9

Load type icon

1-2, 2-3, 3-1, avg, N

Energy icon: Imp, Total, Net, Exp

: inductive load; : capacitive load

1, 2, 3 for 3 phase A, B, C; 1-2, 2-3, 3-1 for 3 phase lineto-line AB, BC, CA; avg for average and N for neutral.

Imp: import energy

Exp: export energy

Total: absolute sum of Imp and Exp energy

Net: algebraic sum of Imp and Exp energy

31

32

10 Units measured

11 Communication icon

12 Energy pulse output indicator

13

Expanded I/O module indicator

14

Profibus module indicator

15

Ethernet module indicator

16

17 Time icon voltage: V, kV; current: A, kA:active power: kW, MW; reactive power: kvar, Mvar; apparent power: kVA, MVA; frequency: Hz; active energy: kWh; reactive energy: kvarh; apparent energy: kVAh; percentage: %; phase angle: °

No icon: no communication

One icon: query sent

Two icons: query sent and response received

No icon: no pulse output

With icon: icon blinks when sending pulse output

M1: one AXM-IO1 connected

M1x2: two AXM-IO1 connected

None: no AXM-IO1 connected

M2: one AXM-IO2 connected

M2x2: two AXM-IO2 connected

None: no AXM-IO2 connected

M3: one AXM-IO3 connected

M3x2: two AXM-IO3 connected

None: no AXM-IO3 connected

No icon: Profibus module not connected

With icon: Profibus module connected

No icon: Ethernet module not connected

With icon:

Ethernet module connected, when the Second

Communication Protocol is setting as Others

BACnet module connected, when the Second

Communication Protocol is setting as BACnet

Current tariff

Time display

There are four keys on the front panel, labeled H, P, E and V/A from left to right. Use these four keys to read real-time metering data, set parameters and navigate the meter.

Note: If the LCD backlight is off, pressing any key one time will bring the backlight on.

3.2 Metering Data

Pressing H and V/A simultaneously will activate the display mode selection and the cursor will flash. Press P or E to move the cursor right or left. To enter the metering mode, move the cursor to "Meter" then press V/A.

In the metering mode, press P and E simultaneously will enter the TOU mode.

In metering mode, the meter displays measurements such as voltage, current, power, power factor, phase angle, unbalance etc.

In the TOU mode, meter displays the energy, maximum demand and it's time in different tariffs.

a) Voltage and Current:

Press V/A to read voltage and current in the metering area. The screen will roll to the next page when V/A is pressed again. It will go back to the first screen if you press V/A at the last screen.

The following figure shows the sequence:

33

34

Note: When the meter is set to “2LL” or “3LL”, there is no phase voltage or neutral current display. Therefore, only the third screen (line voltage & avg) and the the fourth screen (three phase current & avg) will be displayed.

When the meter is set to “1LN”, there are only phase A voltage and phase A current display, without line voltages or other displays.

When the meter is set to “1LL”, there are no phase C voltage and phase C current display.

b) Power, Power Factor and Frequency:

Press P to display power related data.

The screen will roll to the next page when P is pressed again. It will go back to the first screen if you press P at the last screen.

The following figure shows the sequence:

Note: When the meter is set to “2LL” or “3LL”, only the fifth screen (system power) and the sixth screen (system power factor & frequency) will be displayed.

When the meter is set to “1LN”, there are only phase A power and phase A power factor display.

When the meter is set to “1LL”, there are no phase C power and phase C power factor display.

c) Phase Angles and Unbalance:

Press H to display phase angles and unbalance data. The screen will roll to the next page when H is pressed again. It will go back to the first screen if you press

H at the last screen.

The following figure shows the sequence:

When using "2LL" or "3LL" wiring setting mode, voltage stands for line to line voltage. Otherwise, voltage stands for line-to-neutral voltage.

When the meter is set to “1LN”, there is only phase A current to phase A voltage angle display.

35

36

When the meter is set to “1LL”, there is no phase C voltage or current to phase A voltage angle factor display.

d) Energy:

Press E key to display energy and real time clock. The screen will roll to the next page when E is pressed again. It will go back to the first screen if you press E at the last screen.

Acuvim II series meter can be set to record primary energy or secondary energy.The unit of energy is kWh for active energy, kvarh for reactive energy and kVAh for apparent energy. The running time has a resolution of 0.01h.

The meter begins accumulating time upon initial powering up of the unit. The accumulated time is stored in the non-volatile memory. It can be reset via communication or from the meter front.

The following figure shows the sequence:

Sharp Import energy

V/A

Sharp Export energy

V/A

Sharp import reactive energy

Sharp Export reactive energy

V/A

V/A

Sharp

Apparent energy

V/A

Peak Import energy

V/A

……….

V/A

Peak Apparent energy

V/A

………

V/A

Valley Apparent energy

V/A

………

V/A

Normal Apparent energy

V/A

………

V/A

Total Apparent energy

E

P

E

P

E

P

E

P

P

E

P

E

P

E

P

E

P

E

P

E

P

E

P

E

P

E

P

E

Sharp Import max demand

P

V/A

Sharp Export max demand

V/A

Sharp import reactive max demand

V/A

Sharp Export reactive max demand

V/A

Sharp Apparent max demand

V/A

Peak Import max demand

V/A

……….

V/A

Peak A pparent max demand

V/A

………

V/A

Valley Apparent max demand

V/A

………

V/A

Normal Apparent max demand

V/A

………

V/A

Total Apparent max demand

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

Sharp Import max demand year/month/day

P

Sharp Import max demand hour/min/sec

……….

……….

……….

……….

……….

……….

……….

……….

……….

……….

……….

……….

37

e) TOU display

Press “P” and “E” simultaneously to enter the TOU Energy and maximum demand page. Press “E”display the TOU energy. Press “P”display the TOU maximum demand. Press again display the TOU maximum demand year,month and date.

Press again display the TOU maximum demand hour, minute and second. Press

“H”would change the tariffs page. It displays energy under different tariffs in the energy page. It also displays demand under different tariffs in the maximum demang page. Press “V/A”would display different type energy and maximum demand. Press “P” and“E” simultaneously to exit current page and return to metering mode.

3.3 Statistics Data

Pressing H and V/A simultaneously will activate the display mode selection and the cursor will flash. Press P or E to move the cursor right or left. To enter the statistics data mode, scroll the cursor to "Max/Min" then press V/A.

In statistics data mode, the meter displays the maximum values and minimum values for voltage, current, power, power factor, unbalance, demand, THD etc. User should note that time stamp for the parameters can be viewed only from the software through communication. No commands are associated with the key H in "Max/Min" display mode.

When P is pressed again, the screen will roll to the next page, and will roll back to the first screen when pressed at the last page.

When E is pressed the screen will roll back to the previous page, and will roll back to the last screen when pressed at the first page.

Press V/A to switch the view between maximum and minimum. For example, if the current display is the maximum phase voltage value, when V/A is pressed, the display will show the minimum phase voltage value. If V/A is pressed again, the display

38

will switch back to show the maximum phase voltage value.

The following figure shows the sequence:

Note:

i) The figure shows the rolling sequence when pressing P. The sequence will be reversed when pressing E.

ii) When the meter is set to “2LL” or “3LL”, the first screen(max value of phase voltage) will not be displayed.

iii) When the meter is set to “1LL”, there are no such displays as phase C voltage,

Ubc and Uca line voltage, phase C current, three phase voltage and current unbalance factor, Uc and Ic THD, phase C current demand, etc.

iv) When the meter is set to “1LN”, there is only phase A display of phase voltage and current, only Ua and Ia THD display, only demand display of phase A. And there are no such displays as three phase voltage and current unbalance factor, line voltage, etc.

39

3.4 Demand Data

Pressing H and V/A simultaneously will activate the display mode selection and the cursor will flash. Press P or E to move the cursor right or left. To enter demand mode, move the cursor to "Demand" then press V/A.

In the demand data mode, the first screen displays the demand of active power, reactive power and apparent power, and the second screen displays the current demand of phase A, phase B and phase C. When the meter is set to “1LL”, there is no phase C current demand display. When the meter is set to “1LN”, there are no phase B and C current demand display.

As shown in the figure, system active power demand is 3.285kW, system reactive power demand is 0 kvar, system apparent power demand is 3.285 kVA.

3.5 Harmonic Data

Pressing H and V/A simultaneously will activate the display mode selection and the cursor will flash. Press P or E to move the cursor right or left. To enter harmonic mode, move the cursor to "Harmonic" then press V/A.

In the harmonic data mode, meter displays the harmonic ratio of voltage and current, THD, odd HD, even HD, THFF, CF and KF.

40

a) Power Quality Data:

Press H to display power quality data. When H is pressed again, the screen will roll to the next page and will roll back to the first screen when pressed at the last page.

No commands are associated with keys P and E in "Harmonic" display mode.

Press V/A to switch to harmonic ratio data display.

Note: When the meter is set to “1LN”, there is only phase A display for voltage

THD, voltage odd HD, voltage even HD, THFF, voltage crest factor, current THD, current odd HD, current even HD, and current K factor.

When the meter is set to “1LL”, there is no phase C display.

41

b) Harmonic Ratio Data

Press H to switch to power quality data display.

The harmonic order will increase by one each time P is pressed and will return to the 2 nd

when P is pressed at the 63 rd

harmonic.

The harmonic order will decrease by one each time E is pressed and will return to the 63 rd

when E is pressed at the 2 nd

harmonic.

Press V/A to switch display between voltage harmonics and current harmonics.

The following figure shows the sequence:

42

Note:

1. The figure shows the rolling sequence when pressing P. If E is pressed, the sequence will reverse.

2. Harmonic is 2 nd

~63 rd

.

3. When the meter is set to “1LN”, there is only phase A display for voltage and current harmonic magnitude.

4. When the meter is set to “1LL”, there is no phase C display for voltage and current harmonic magnitude.

3.6 Expanded I/O Module Data

Pressing H and V/A simultaneously will activate the display mode selection and the cursor will flash. Press P or E to move the cursor right or left. To access data from the expanded I/O modules, move the cursor to "Digital I/O" then press V/A to enter the expanded I/O module data mode.

In the expanded I/O module data mode, the meter displays the data from expanded I/O modules, such as DI status, pulse counter number, relay status, analog input, and analog output etc.

In this mode, the first page is module selection. You can choose to view the available modules that are attached to the meter. If no expanded I/O modules are connected, the screen will display "NO IO".

a) Module Selection:

No commands are associated with the key H in the module selection screen.

Press P to move the cursor downwards, the cursor will move to the top when it reaches the bottom. If only one module is connected, Pressing P will have no effect.

Press E to move the cursor upwards, the cursor will move to the bottom when it reaches the top. If only one module is connected, Pressing E will have no effect.

Press V/A to select the module and enter the I/O module data selection mode.

43

44

As shown in the figure, three modules are connected, AXM-IO11, AXM-IO21,

AXM-IO31, which are indicated by M11, M21, M31 respectively. The cursor points to M21, which indicates that AXM-IO21 is chosen now.

b) I/O Module Data Selection

Press H to return to module selection screen.

Press P to move the cursor downwards, the cursor will move to the top when it reaches the bottom. Please note that there are 3 parameters for AXM-IO1, 3 parameters for AXM-IO2 and 4 parameters for AXM-IO3.

Press E to move the cursor upwards, the cursor will move to the bottom when it reaches the top.

Press V/A to select the parameter and enter the display of the data.

c) I/O module data display

Press H to return to I/O module data selection screen.

The screen will roll to the next page each time P is pressed and will return to the first page when P is pressed at the last page. If only one page exists, pressing P will have no effect.

The screen will roll to the last page each time E is pressed and will return to the last page E is pressed at the first page. If only one page exists, pressing E will have no effect.

No commands are associated with the key V/A in this display.

The following figure shows the sequence:

45

46

Note: The figure shows the rolling sequence for using key P. If using E key for rolling page, the sequence will reverse.

3.7 Parameter Setting Mode

Pressing H and V/A simultaneously will activate the display mode selection and the cursor will flash. Press P or E to move the cursor right or left. To enter parameter setting mode, move the cursor to "Setting" then press V/A.

In the parameter setting mode, parameters such as system parameters, expanded I/O module parameters, alarm parameters and Ethernet module parameters, can be read and modified.

a) Password Inquiry:

Parameter setting mode is password protected. Before entering the password and getting into the parameter setting mode, the meter's device communication address will display for 3 seconds. A four digit password (0000 to 9999) is required everytime before accessing the parameter setting mode.

The default password is 0000. After entering the password, press V/A to go to the parameter selection page. The meter will be still in the password inquiry page if a wrong password is entered.

The following figure shows the password inquiry page.

47

To input password:

Press H to move the flashing cursor to the next position.

Press P to increase the number by 1.

Press E to decrease the number by 1.

Press V/A to confirm the password.

b) Parameter Selection Mode

There are four parameters to choose from in the parameter selection manual: system, expanded I/O module, Ethernet module and alarm.

No commands are associated with the H key in the parameter selection manual.

Press P to move the cursor downwards, the cursor will move to the top when it reaches the bottom.

Press E to move the cursor upwards, the cursor will move to the bottom when it reaches the top.

48

Press V/A to select and modify the parameter.The figure shows the parameter selection page. “SYS” stands for system parameter, “I/O” stands for expanded

I/O module parameter, “NET” stands for Ethernet module parameter and “ALM”

stands for alarm parameter. As shown in the figure, the cursor points to the “SYS”, which means system parameter is selected.

c) System Parameter Setting

Users can select and modify system parameter in the system parameter setting mode.

Key functions for selecting a parameter:

Press H to return to parameter selection mode.

The screen will roll to the next page each time P is pressed and will return to the first page when P is pressed at the last page.

The screen will roll to the last page each time E is pressed and will return to the last page when E is pressed at the first page.

Press V/A to modify the selected parameter.

Key functions for modifying the parameter:

Press H to move the flashing cursor to the next position.

Press P to increase the number by 1.

Press E to decrease the number by 1.

Press V/A to confirm the modification and return to parameter selection mode.

The following figure shows the sequence:

49

50

51

52

Note: The figure shows the rolling sequence for usingthe P key. If using the E key for rolling page, the sequence will reverse.

d) Expanded I/O Module Parameter

In the expanded I/O module parameter mode, user can choose to view the available modules that are attached to the meter and modify their parameters.

If no expanded I/O modules are connected, the screen will display "NO IO". To return to system parameter setting mode main menu, press H (no commands are associated with other keys in this screen).

Key functions for I/O module selection:

Press H to return to parameter selection mode.

Press P to move the cursor downwards. The cursor will move to the top when it reaches the bottom. If there is only one module connected, pressing P will have no effect.

Press E to move the cursor upwards, the cursor will move to the bottom when it reaches the top.

If there is only one module connected, pressing E will have no effect.

Press V/A to select the module and enter the I/O module parameter setting mode.

Key functions for setting the I/O module parameter:

Press H to return to I/O module selection mode.

The screen will roll to the next page each time P is pressed and will return to the first page when P is pressed at the last page.

The screen will roll to the last page each time E is pressed and will return to the last page when E is pressed at the first page.

Press V/A to modify the selected parameter.

Key functions for modifying the parameter:

Press H to move the flashing cursor to the next position.

Press P to increase the number by 1.

Press E to decrease the number by 1.

Press V/A to confirm the modification and return to parameter selection mode.

The following table shows the sequence:

53

54

DI of AXM-IO2 can be used as the pulse counter, each DI function corresponds to one bit of a 4-bit register. The correspondence bit of 0 means that the DI works as the digital status input and the correspondence bit of 1 means that the

DI works as the pulse counter. For example, if the setting value is 0001, it means that DI1 is set as the pulse counter and other DIs work as digital status inputs.

If the DI works as a pulse counter, when the number of pulses counted by the

DI equals to the pulse constant, the pulse counter will increase by one. This means that the actual pulse number equals the number of pulses counted multiplied by the pulse constant.

DO of AXM-IO1 can be used as either alarm output or energy pulse output.

ALM: alarm output; PUL: energy pulse output

Range from 20-1000 ms.

Choose output energy type for DO1. Range from 0-4. 0: no output; 1: import active energy; 2: export active power; 3: import reactive energy; 4: export reactive energy.

Follow the DO1 setup method to setup DO2.

If DO type is set as alarm output, DO1 and DO2 output type parameters will have no effect.

Range from 0 to 3, 0: 0-20mA; 1: 4~20mA; 2: 0-5V; 3: 1-5V.

Be aware that modules with current option cannot be set as voltage type (i.e. option 2 and 3 are unavailable); modules with voltage option cannot be set as current type (i.e. option 0 and 1 are unavailable).

For AO1 and AO2 transforming parameter:

Range: 0~29, see Chapter 5 page 99 "AO transforming parameter settings" for more details.

55

56

DI of AXM-IO3 can be used as the pulse counter, each DI function corresponds to one bit of a 4-bit register. The correspondence bit of 0 means that the DI works as the digital status input and the correspondence bit of 1 means that the DI works as the pulse counter. For example, if the setting value is 0001, it means that DI1 is set as the pulse counter and other DIs work as digital status inputs.

If the DI works as a pulse counter, when the number of pulses counted by the DI equals to the pulse constant, the pulse counter will increase by one. This means that the actual pulse number equals the number of pulses counted multiplied by the pulse constant.

When set as control output, relays have two control methods: latch or pulse

Relays of AXM-IO3 can be used as alarm output or control output.

ALM:alarm output; CTRL:control output

If relay pulse control method is selected, the relay contact will close for a preset period and open afterwards. The pulse width range is 50~3000 ms.

Range from 0 to 3. 0: 0~20mA; 1: 4~20mA; 2: 0~5V; 3: 1~5V.

Be aware that modules with current option cannot be set as voltage type

(i.e. option 2 and 3 are unavailable); modules with voltage option cannot be set as current type (i.e. option 0 and 1 are unavailable).

Note: The figure shows the rolling sequence for using key P. If using E key for rolling page, the sequence will reverse.

e) BACnet and Ethernet Module Parameter

When the second communication protocol is set to BACnet, there is parameters display related to BACnet, while these pages only show as modules successfully connecting with meter. If meter does not detect any module, there will show

LOADING page. To set these parameters, first, select, then modify and save. On the one side, if there is no extra BACnet module, setting will be meaningless and not saved after shutting down. On the other side, setting is valid and will be saved into BACnet module when there is a BAVnet module attached.

When second communication protocol is other protocol, there is parameters display related to Ethernet. The condition is same as above.

Key functions for finding the Ethernet module parameter:

Press H to return to parameter selection mode.

The screen will roll to the next page each time P is pressed and will return to the first page when P is pressed at the last page.

The screen will roll to the last page each time E is pressed and will return to the last page when E is pressed at the first page.

Press V/A to modify the selected parameter.

Key functions for modifying the parameter:

Press H to move the flashing cursor to the next position.

Press P to increase the number by 1, while the number was 9(Ethernet), or

7(BACnet IP), or 3(BACnet MS/TP), the number will return to 0 after press P.

Press E to decrease the number by 1, while the number was 0, the number will return to 9(Ethernet), or 7(BACnet IP), or 3(BACnet MS/TP) after press E.

Press V/A to confirm the modification and return to parameter selection mode.

The following figure shows the sequence of Ethernet module.

57

58

The selection of DHCP setting: MANU or AUTO

Default setting: MANU

IP address has four segments. Any segment can be set from

0~255.

Default setting: 192.168.1.254

Submask has four segments. Any segment can be set from 0~255.

Default setting: 255.255.255.0

Gateway has four segments. Any segment can be set from 0~255.

Default setting: 192.168.1.1

DNS1 has four segments. Any segment can be set from 0~255.

Default setting: 202.106.0.20

DNS2 has four segments. Any segment can be set from 0~255.

Default setting: 0.0.0.0

Range from 2000-5999, the default value is 502

Range from 6000-9999, the default value is 80

0: No resetting; 1: Reset module after modifying parameters; 2:

Reset module to default values

0:No resetting; 1: Reset password

Note: The figure shows the rolling sequence for using key P. If using E key for rolling page, the sequence will reverse.

BACnet IP module rolling sequence:

IP

59

BACnet MS/TP module rolling sequence

60

f) Alarm Parameter

In the alarm parameter mode, user can view and modify the parameters.

Key functions for finding the alarm parameter:

Press H to return to parameter selection mode.

The screen will roll to the next page each time P is pressed and will return to the first page when P is pressed at the last page.

The screen will roll to the last page each time E is pressed and will return to the last page when E is pressed at the first page.

Press V/A to modify the selected parameter.

Key functions for modifying the parameter:

Press H to move the flashing cursor to the next position.

Press P to increase the number by 1.

Press E to decrease the number by 1.

Press V/A to confirm the modification and return to parameter selection mode.

The following figure shows the sequence:

Yes: Alarm enable; No: Alarm disable

It can be selected as cue signal for alarming.

Yes: backlight flashes upon alarm condition; No: no backlight flashing

There are 16 alarm channels available. Each channel is controlled and enabled

1 bit each from a 16-bit register. Bit value of 1 means that the corresponding alarm channel is enabled whereas 0 means that the channel is disabled. The meter will display the value of this 16-bit register in decimal numbers (for different channel combination). For example, 00000 means that all channels are disabled; 00001 means only the first channel is enabled; 65535 means that all channels are enabled. Refer to section 4.4 on page 65 for more details.

"AND" logic relationship can be set among channels. When an "AND" logic is in place, both channels have to be triggered before the meter sends out the alarm signal. The logic can be set according to the predefined rule (refer to section 4.4 for more details). User can setup up to 8 logic relationships for alarming. Each logic relationship is controlled and enabled 1 bit each from a 16-bit register (only the lower 8 bits are used). Bit value of 1 means that the corresponding logic relationship is enabled whereas 0 means that the relationship is disabled. The meter will display this 8-bit value in decimal numbers (for different relationship combination). For example, 000 means that all relationships are disabled; 001 means only the first relationship is enabled; 255 means that all relationships are enabled.

When DO1 works in alarming mode, a 16-bit register is used to control which channels are associated with this output. Similar to the alarm channel selection, this 16-bit value is expressed in decimal when reading on the meter front. For example, 00000 means that no alarm channels are associated to this output;

00001 means that alarm channel 1 is associated to DO1; 65535 means that all alarm channels are associated to DO1. Refer to section 4.4 for more details.

If 2 AXM-IO2 modules are attached to the meter, DO1 and DO2 denote to the first and the second DO channel of AXM-IO21; DO3 and DO4 denote to the first and the second DO channel of AXMIO22 respectively. DO2, DO3 and DO4 use the same setup method as DO1.

61

Note: The figure shows the rolling sequence for using key P. If using E for rolling page, the sequence will reverse.

3.8 Page Recovery Function

Acuvim II series meter has a page recovery function. This means that the meter stores current display page in the non-volatile memory upon power loss and reloads the page when power recovers. If power goes off when viewing under the parameter setting mode, the meter will show voltage display when power recovers. If power goes off when viewing under the expanded I/O module data mode, and if this expanded I/O module is not connected when power recovers, the meter will show the voltage display page instead.

62

Chapter 4 Detailed Functions and Software

4.1 Basic Analog Measurements

4.2 Max/Min

4.3 Harmonics and Power Quality Analysis

4.4 Over/Under Limit Alarming

4.5 Data Logging

4.6 Time Of Use(TOU)

4.7 Power Quality Event Logging and Waveform

Capture

4.8 Seal function

The Acuvim II series meter contains advanced metering tools and is able to measure a multitude of power, energy and power quality parameters. Some advanced functions may not be accessible directly from the meter front; therefore, every meter comes with a powerful software that helps access the information. This chapter introduces these functions and the software.

4.1 Basic Analog Measurements

Acuvim II series meter can measure voltage, current, power, frequency, power factor, demand, etc. With high accuracy, as shown via the software below:

64

Fig 4-1 Real-Time Metering

Demand:

This meter consists of several types of demand calculation: total active power demand, total reactive power demand, total apparent power demand, phase A current demand, phase B current demand, and phase C current demand. When demand is reset, demand memory registers are set as 0.

Demand calculating mode can be set as sliding window and thermal according to user. The figure 4-7 shows how it works.

When using the sliding window interval method, user selects an interval from

1 to 30 minutes, which is the period of the calculation. The demand updates every 1 minute as the window slides once.

Thermal demand method calculates the demand based on a thermal response which mimics a thermal demand meter. User selects the period for the calculation and the demand updates at the end of each period.

Energy:

This meter measures and accumulates energy in different directions (import and export). For real-time energy monitoring, it accumulates energy for kWh, kvarh and kVAh continuous (since its last reset).

Calculating mode

1. User can select different energy calculating modes, fundamental based or full-wave based either from the meter front or via communication. Fundamental based calculating is used to accumulate energy without taking harmonics into consideration while full-wave based calculating is used to accumulate energy including fundamental and harmonics.

Note: When fundamental based calculating mode is selected, PF calculation will

be based on the fundamental wave.

65

2. There are two ways to calculate reactive energy(power)

Mode 0: real reactive energy

Mode 1: general reactive energy

3. User can choose primary energy or secondary energy either by pressing keys from the meter front or via communication as shown in figure 4-7.

Note: Acuvim II is able to display either primary energy or secondary energy on the LCD screen; however, it is only able to send out pulses according to secondary energy via the AXM-IO module.

66

Fig 4-2 Energy and Power Quality Parameters

Current direction adjustment

Under normal circumstances, current flows from input terminal 1 to terminal

2 (i.e. from I11 to I12 for phase A current); however, current may flow in the opposite direction due to incorrect wiring setup. Instead of rewiring the system, the meter provides users an option to reverse the polarity of the current. By default, current direction is set as "positive", to reverse the current polarity by

180 degrees, user can set current direction as "negative". Refer to Fig 4.7 for more details.

Fig 4-3 Max/Min

67

4.2 Max/Min

Acuvim II series meter logs maximum and minimum value statistics for phase/ line voltages, current, power, reactive power, apparent power, power factor, frequency, demand, unbalance factor, THD as well as the time they occur. All data is stored in non-volatile memory so that statistic information can be preserved even when meter is shut off. All maximum and minimum data can be accessed via communication or from the meter front but time stamps can only be accessed via communication. Statistics can be cleared via communication or from the meter front.

4.3 Harmonics and Power Quality Analysis

1. Harmonics

Acuvim II series meter can measure and analyze THD, harmonics harmonics

2 nd

to 63 rd

, even HD, odd HD, crest factor, THFF, K factor etc. They are shown in figure 4-2.

2. Phase angle:

Phase angle indicates the angle between phase A voltage and other voltage/ current parameters. Angle ranges from 0 to 360 degrees. This function is to help users find out the relationship between all input signals avoiding wrong wiring. When it is set to “2LL” or “3LL”, it gives out the phase angles of u23, u31, i1, i2,i3 corresponding to u12. When it is set to “3LN”, it gives out the phase angles of u2, u3, i1, i2 and i3 corresponding to u1. When it is set to “1LL”, it gives out the phase angles of u2, i1, i2 corresponding to u1. They are shown in figure

4-4.

3. Sequence component and unbalance analysis

Acuvim II series meter is able to perform sequential analysis for the input signal.

68

It looks at the positive sequence, negative sequence and zero sequence of the fundamental frequency and performs unbalance analysis for voltage and current. Sequence components are shown in figure 4-4, unbalance of voltage and current are shown in figure 4-1.

Fig 4-4 Sequence component and Phase angle(for example, 3LN)

4.4 Over/Under Limit Alarming

Acuvim II series meter has over/under limit alarming capabilites. When the monitored parameter goes over/under the preset limit and stays at the level over the preset amount of time delay, the over/under limit alarm will be triggered. The over/under limit value and its time stamp will be recorded in the

69

alarming log. The meter can record up to 16 alarming records. When extended

I/O modules are attached, digital outputs (DO) and relay outputs (RO) can be triggered upon alarm conditions and used to activate downstream devices such as a beacon light or a buzzer.

Before using the alarming function, alarm conditions such as logic dependency, target setpoint, time delay etc must be set correctly. Settings can be accessed and modified from the software via communication connection as shown in Fig

4-5.

70

Fig 4-5 Alarm Setting

1. Single Alarming Group Setting

Table 4-1 indicates the first group of settings, there are 16 groups in total with the same format.

Table 4-1 First Group of Alarming Settings

Address

104eH

104fH

1050H

1051H

1052H

Parameter

First group: parameter code

First group: comparison mode

First group: setpoint value

First group: delay time

First group: output to relay

Range

0~79

1:larger,2:equal,3:smaller

Related with parameters

0~3000(*10ms)

0:none,1-8:related relay

Property

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

Parameter code: select target parameter for alarm monitoring For example:

0-frequency, 44-AI4 sampling data.

Comparison mode: set alarming condition 1: greater than, 2: equal to, 3: smaller than. For example: if you choose target parameter to be "frequency", condition to be "greater than" and setpoint to be "50", alarm will be triggered when the frequency is greater than 50Hz.

Note: setpoint value is the same as the actual value of the selected parameter.

Delay time: If the alarms condition lasts for the preset time period, the alarm signal will be triggered. The delay range is from 0 to 3000 (unit: 10ms). When it is set to 0, there is no delay, alarm will be triggered when the alarm condition is met. If it is set to 20, there will be a 200ms (20 x 10ms) delay.

Output to relay: 0-alarming signal will not be sent to RO; if it is set as 1 and AXM-

IO11 is connected, it will output to RO1 when alarm triggers. RO1 will be turned off when all alarms output to RO1 are cleared. RO2~RO8 work in the same manner as RO1.

71

72

Note: 1) If RO is under alarming mode, it can only work in “latch” mode.

2) If the number is 51~79, there are special guide for contrast method and meaning of parameters, please refer to Chapter 6.

After setting up the alarming parameters, user must also setup the global settings in order for the alarm to work properly.

2. Global settings

Register addresses for global alarm settings are from 1046H~104dH. Please refer to section 5.3, page 95 "Global alarming settings" for more details.

“Global alarming enable” determines whether the alarming function of the meter is activated or not. The alarming function is enabled when it is set as "1".

When “Alarming flash enable“ is set as “1”, backlight will flash when alarm is triggered.

“Alarming channel enable setting” determines whether the corresponding alarm group is enabled or not. There are 16 groups in all and each one is corresponding to one bit of a 16-bit register. The corresponding bit must be set to "1" in order to activate the alarm channel.

Logic "AND" between alarm setting: The 16 alarming records in the meter are divided into 8 pairs. Each pair has two alarm groups. The two groups can be logically “AND” by controlling the logic check box. When two groups are “AND”, alarming triggers only if both AND conditions are met. If the "AND" logic box is unchecked, the two alarm channels will work independently.

The 8 "AND" logic pairs are arranged as follows: 1 st , 2 nd channel form Pair 1; 3 rd ,

4 th

channel form Pair 2; 5 th

, 6 th

channel form Pair 3; 7 th

, 8 th

channel form Pair 4;

9 rd , 10 th channel form Pair 5; 11 th , 12 th channel form Pair 6; 13 th , 14 th channel form

Pair 7; 15 th

, 16 th

channel form Pair 8.

This function is controlled by the lower 8 bits of the 16-bit register and each bit is corresponding to a pair. “1” means this function is enabled and “0” means disabled.

“Alarming output to DO1 setting”: When “Digital output mode” is set to “1”,

DO1 can be used as alarming output. A 16-bit register is used to perform this function, its bit0~bit15 correspond to the 1 st

~16 th

group respectively. When the related I/O module is connected and is under alarming mode, and if the corresponding bit is set to 1 and the alarming condition is met, alarm signal will be sent to DO1. DO1 will be turned off when all alarms correspond to DO1 are cleared. If related bit is set to 0, that alarm channel will not issue alarm signal to

DO1. DO2~DO4 work in the same manner DO1.

After completing the setup steps correctly, alarming function can be used.

3. Setting Example

Here is an example showing how to apply the logic "AND" function for a pair of alarm channels.

The conditions are as follows: I1 greater than 180A, delay 5s for the 1 st

alarm channel; U1 less than 9980V, delay 10s for the 2 nd

alarm channel. No alarm signals will be sent to outputs. The CT primary value of I1 is 200A, and CT2 is

5A. The PT ratio for U1 is 10000:100. The following shows how all the related registers are to be set.

Settings of first group:

“Parameter code (104eH)” is set to 9, which stands for I1.

“Comparison mode (104fH)” is set to 1, which stands for "greater than".

“Setpoint value (1050H)” is set to 4500, according to the relationship between actual value and communication value (I=Rx * (CT1/CT2) /1000).

73

74

“Delay time (1051H)” is set to 500, so the actual delay time is 500*10ms=5s.

“Output to relay (1052H)” is set to 0, because there is no output to RO.

Settings of second group:

“Parameter code (1053H)” is set to 1, which stands for U1.

“Comparison mode (1054H)” is set to 3, which stands for "smaller than".

“Setpoint value (1055H)” is set to 998, according to the relationship between actual value and communication value (U=Rx X (PT1/PT2) /10).

“Delay time (1056H)” is set to 1000, so the actual delay time is 1000*10ms=10s.

“Output to relay (1057H)” is set to 0, because there is no output to RO.

Global settings:

“Alarming channel enable setting (1048H)” set to 0003H to enable the first and the second channel.

“Logic "AND" between alarming setting (1049H)” set to 0001H to enable logic

"AND" in Pair 1.

“Alarming output to DO1 setting (104aH)” set to 0, since no output to DO1.

“Alarming output to DO2 setting (104bH)” set to 0.

“Alarming output to DO3 setting (104cH)” set to 0.

“Alarming output to DO4 setting (104dH)” set to 0.

“Alarming flash enable (1047H)” set to 0 to disable backlight flashing when alarming occurs.

“Global alarming enable (1046H)” set to 1 to enable over/under limit alarming.

4. Records of Alarming Event

Acuvim II series meter has built in alarm logging capabilities. 16 entries can be recorded in total. The record sequence of these entries do not depend on the sequence of the 16 alarm channels. The meter begins logging alarm status starting from the 1 st

record location to the last one. Alarm logs are being recorded in a "cycle" fashion which means the latest event will overwrite the oldest record. When over/under limit parameters return to normal, its value and time stamp will be recorded as well. Therefore, users can determine the over/ under limit duration by checking the time difference.

Here is the 1 st

group of records. Other groups of records have the same format.

Address

42a9H

42aaH

42abH

42acH~42b2H

Table 4-2 Alarming status of the 1 st

group of record

Parameter

First group: alarming status

First group: parameter code

First group: over/under limit or reset value

First group: occur time: yyyy:mm:dd:hh:mm:ss:ms

Range

0~65535

0~50

Related with parameters time

“Alarming status” indicates information of current alarm status. It is a 16-bit unsigned integer. Parameter code is stored in the higher 8 bits. Bit1 indicates whether logic "AND" is enabled or not, 1 means enabled and 0 means not. Bit0 indicates whether alarming has occured or recovered, 1 means occurred and 0 means recovered.Undefined bits are 0.

“Parameter code” specifies the monitored parameter.

“Value” shows the recorded value of the selected parameter when an alarm is triggered and when it recovers.

75

76

“Time” indicates the time stamp with the accuracy in milliseconds (ms).

Alarming event will set bit0 of “system status (102EH)” to be 1. When software send clear alarm command, Bit0 of “system status (102EH)” will be set to 0.

Alarming group number (1032H): the range is 0~16, 0 is no alarm record, and others stand for which record is newest alarm. Alarming group number can be saved during meter power off, and it is cycling recording.

Here is an example:

Fig 4-6 Alarming records

Fig 4-7 basic settings

4.5 Data Logging

The

Acuvim IIR/IIE/IIW

meter provides data logging that records the data at a set interval.This meter has 8 MegaBytes of memory which gives it extensive datalogging capabilities. It has a real-time clock that allows logs to be time-stamped

77

when log events are created.

1. Data log settings

The

Acuvim IIR/IIE/IIW

meter has three sets of historical data logs. Each log can be independently programmed with individual settings, meaning that each can be used to monitor different parameters. You can program up to 117 parameters per log. You also have the ability to allocate available system resources among the three logs, to increase or decrease the size of the individual historical logs.

The total size is no more than 100 sectors that has 64k bytes. The data log 1 setting is shown in Fig 4-8.

78

Fig 4-8 The data log 1 setting

Having three sets of historical logs provides you with the option of programming each log with unique parameters. For example, you can program

Historical Log 1 to record measured values parameters (for example, Frequency,

Voltage, Current), Log 2 to record energy values parameters, and Log 3 to record power quality parameters. Historical Log parameters can be selected from the following thirteen groups:

• Real-Time Metering (Frequency; Instantaneous Voltage; Instantaneous Current;

Total and Per Phase Power and Power Factor; Neutral Current ; unbalance V/I; load type; Current demand; and Per Phase/ Total Power demand)

• Energy (Ep_imp; Ep_exp; Ep_total; Ep_net; Eq_imp; Eq_exp; Eq_total; Eq_net and Es)

• THD Volts AN/AB(THD, 2 nd

-63 rd

Harmonic Magnitudes, ODD, EVEN, CF and THFF of Volts AN/AB)

• THD Volts BN/BC (THD,2 nd

-63 rd

Harmonic Magnitudes,ODD,EVEN,CF and THFF of

Volts BN/BC)

• THD Volts CN/CA (THD, average THD, 2 nd

-63 rd

Harmonic Magnitudes, ODD, EVEN,

CF and THFF of Volts CN/CA)

• THD IA (THD, 2 nd

-63 rd

Harmonic Magnitudes, ODD, EVEN, KF of IA)

• THD IB (THD, 2 nd

-63 rd

Harmonic Magnitudes, ODD, EVEN, KF of IB)

• THD IC (THD, average THD, 2 nd

-63 rd

Harmonic Magnitudes, ODD, EVEN, KF of IC)

• Sequence Component (positive, negative and zero sequence)

• Phase Angles(the angle between U1 and other voltage and current parameters.)

• DI Counter (the DI numbers of the IO modules)

79

80

• AO/AI Raw Value (the AO output register values and the AI sample register values)

• AO/AI Value(the AO output values and the AI sample values)

The following procedures show how to select and store parameters in historical log 1. The Group field determines the items that are available for selection.

1) Select a Group. The possible selections are: Real-Time Metering, Energy,

THD Volts AN/AB, THD Volts BN/BC , THD Volts CN/CA , THD IA , THD IB , THD IC,

Sequence Component, Phase Angles, DI Counter, AO/AI Raw Value and AO/AI

Value.

2) Select items for your log: a. Highlight the parameter(s) you want to log into the meter's memory.

b. Click Add to add the parameter to the Selected Parameter Area.

c. To remove parameter(s), highlight them in the Selected Parameter Area and click Remove.

3) Set the logging interval (in minutes). Interval can be set from 0 - 1444 minutes according to different application.

The logging interval determines when the meter takes a snapshot.When interval is set as 0, the set of historical data log is disabled.

4) There are 100 sectors in total for the 3 historical data logs. User can assign different sector size to each log according to different applications (as long as the total sector sizes of the 3 logs do not exceed 100).

5) Three Modes of historical log:

A. Mode1: if correctly set historical log, can record without setting date and time, depending on first-in first-out recycling log.

B. Mode2: if correctly set historical log, as set date and time, can record within begin to end time. Record will stop after buffer is full.

C. Mode3: if correctly set historical log, as set hour and minute, only can record while the running time is equal to setting hour and minute, depending on firstin first-out recycling log.

NOTES:

• If the memory of the historical data log is full, the meter will erase the first sector in which the memory size is 65536 bytes (64kb). The following sector

(the second sector) will become the first sector and the data from the erased sector will not be recoverable. Therefore, user should save the whole log before memory is full to maintain all the data.

• There are two display fields at the bottom of the data log setting screen. They show the registers in the logs ,the total bytes used and the bytes remaining for this historical log. These fields are updated as you make selections on the screen. The total number of bytes available per log record is approximately 234.

2. Retrieving logs

There are two ways of retrieving the logs: "read one window" and "read all".The retrieval screen is shown in Fig 4-9.

81

82

Fig 4-9 Retrieval screen

The "read one window" method allows you to access and read a specific log location at an offset from the first log. The "window record num" is the maximum number of record entries the software can read at a time, it is calculated by 246 / Record Size. The larger this number is, the faster data can be retrieved. Log type is the logs you want to retrieve, for example, log type 0 is data logging 1,log type 1 is data logging 2 and log type 2 is data logging 3.

The "read all" method accesses and reads the historical data log automatically, the offset increases automatically until all the logs are retrieved.

The data logs contents are shown at the bottom of the page.

4.6 Time of use (TOU)

User can assign up to 4 different tariffs (sharp, peak, valleyand normal) to different time period within a day according to the billing requirements. The meter will calculate and accumulate energy to different tariffs according to the meter’s internal clock timing and TOU settings.

TOU setting: User can set a maximum of 12 TOU seasons, each season can be assigned to a TOU schedule (a maximum of 14 TOU schedules are available).

Each schedule can be divided up into 14 segments (in which each segment can have its own tariff ).User can customize the TOU calendar (including its tariffs, seasons, schedules and segments) according to different applications. To make sure that the TOU calendar is setup correctly, the meter will check the TOU settings according to the predefined rules (see below for “TOU setting format requirement” for details).TOU function will be disabled if the TOU calendar is set up incorrectly. If no errors are found in the calendar and the TOU function is enabled, TOU energyaccumulation will begin.

TOU setting format requirement:

1. Season setting parameter: The calendar year will be divided up into different seasons depending on the season setting parameter. The parameter can be selected from any integer between 1 to 12. User must enter the correct value for the season setting parameter in accordance to the TOU season table. If the season setting parameter is set as 2, the first 2 slots of the TOU season table must be set, otherwise it will be considered as an invalid input (TOU function will be disabled).

2. TOU season format: Enter the start date into the TOU season table slot following this format “MM-DD ID” - MM stands for the month, DD stands for the day and ID stands for the TOU schedule ID (available from 01 to 14). The dates should be organized so that they are in sequence according to the calendar

83

84 year (the earlier date comes first and the later date comes last). For example, if 3 seasons are selected, the date parameters are January 1, June 6 and September 7, and TOU schedule 02, 01, 03 will be used respectively, the first TOU season table slot shall enter 01-01 02, the second slot shall enter 06-06 01, and the third slot shall enter 09-07 03. Entering 01-01 02 for the first slot, 09-07 03 for the second slot and 06-06 01 for the third slot is considered invalid.

3. Schedule setting parameter: The number of available TOU schedules depends on the schedule setting parameter. The parameter can be selected from any integer between 1 to 14. This parameter determines the number of

TOU schedules available for the TOU calendar setting. A maximum of 14 TOU schedules (from TOU Schedule #1 to TOU Schedule #14) can be used.

4. Segment setting parameter: Each TOU schedule consists of various timing segments. The number of segments depends on the segment setting parameter setup. The parameter can be selected from any integer between 1 to 14 (inclusively). User must enter the correct value for the segment setting parameter in accordance to the TOU schedule table. If the segment setting parameter is set as 3, the first 3 slots of the TOU schedule table must be set, otherwise, it will be considered as an invalid input (TOU function will be disabled).

5. TOU schedule format: Each TOU schedule represents a 24 hour cycle. Similar to TOU season format, enter the start time into the TOU schedule table slot following this format “HH:MM ID” - HH stands for hour (in 24 hr format), MM stands for minutes and ID stands for tariffs (available from 00 to 03). The time should be organized according to the hour sequence. For example, if 3 segments are selected, timing parameters are 01:00, 15:30, 22:45, the order of the 3 segments should be one of the following: 01:00, 15:30, 22:45 or 15:30,

22:45, 01:00 or 22:45, 01:00, 15:30 Entering time information in a wrong sequence (for example, entering 15:30, 01:00, 22:45) is considered as an invalid operation, TOU function will be disabled.

6. Tariff setting parameter: This parameter corresponds to the number of tariffs available for the TOU calendar and can be selected from any integer from 0 to 3.

The four tariffs: sharp, peak, valley and normal are represented by 4 integers: 0,

1, 2 and 3 respectively. If the tariff setting parameter is set to 3, all of the 4 tariffs will be available for the TOU calendar; if the parameter is set to 1, only the first 2 tariffs (sharp and peak) will be available.

7. Holiday setting parameter: This parameter can be set from any integer between 1 and 30, meaning a maximum of 30 holidays can be programmed to the TOU calendar. If the holiday setting parameter is set as 3, the first 3 slots of the holiday schedule must be set, otherwise it will be considered as an invalid input (TOU function will be disabled).

Note: User can either customize the TOU calendar factory settings or use the default factory settings. User can reset the TOU calendar to its default value either via communication or from the meter front.

8. Holiday schedule: The holiday schedule uses the same format as the TOU seasons “MM-DD ID”. User can select which TOU schedule to be used for the holiday. The dates of the holiday schedule do not need to be organized in a sequential order (i.e. the first slot can be January 1, the second slot can be

December 26 and the third slot can be December 25).

9. Daylight saving time (DST): Daylight saving time can be enabled in one of two formats: The fixed date option, or a fixed day of one of the weeks in the month

(also named as the non-fixed date option). if you choose a fixed date option, you set the format according to a fixed date, for the daylight saving time switch: the format month / day / hour / minute / adjust time (in minutes). If you choose non-fixed date option, DST will be implemented by which day of which week, whose setting format is month/which day (i. e. Tuesday)/which week (i. e. 1st week)/hour/minute/adjust time(in minutes).

85

By using the function, you can cause the instrument to automatically switch to and from daylight saving time. When the clock starts to run to daylight saving time, the meter will automatically adjust the clock to a time period in advance, while the clock is running to the end of daylight saving time, meter will automatically adjust the clock pushed back to a time period, as shown in

Fig 4-10

86

Fig 4-10 Daylight saving time setting interface

10. Ten-year Holiday setting

Users can preset holidays of the next decade via the meter software. The holiday format is month/day/year; holiday code; holiday schedule. After the format setup, click on "Make Holiday Settings (10 year)", then a holiday table for the next decade will be generated.

Holiday Auto Switch: When Ten-year Holiday is enabled, if the current year of

the meter falls into the Ten-year Holiday setting, it automatically loads the Tenyear Holiday settings into the current TOU settings. If the current year of the meter does not fall into the Ten-year Holiday setting, it remains the current TOU settings.

Fig 4-11 ten years holiday table

11. Weekend Schedule: Weekend Setting (bit0 : Sunday; bit1 ~ bit6: Monday to

Saturday; bit 0 means not effective, bit 1 means effective). For example, when the Weekend Setting bit0 is 1, it means Sunday is effective. When the Weekend

Setting bit1 is 1, it means Monday is effective. For example, if a user wants to set

Saturday and Sunday effective, he should put 65 (1000001) into the Weekend

Setting field. When the meter clock is within the preset Weekend Schedule, the

87

88 energy will accumulate under the tariff that corresponds to the Schedule.

Note: Holiday schedule has the highest priority among all the schedules.

Weekend schedule's priority is followed by Holiday schedule. When Holiday schedule is not enabled, Weekend schedule has the highest priority, overiding the normal (weekday) schedule.

Acuvim IIE can record maximum power and current demand under different tariffs, as well as the time stamp of the maximum value. It can also clear the maximum demand under diferent tarifs.

Except normal energy parameter readings, Acuvim IIE has 2 separate logs:

Current Month TOU and Prior Month TOU. When setup appropriately and when

TOU is enabled, energy will be accumulated in a month-to-month basis. The current energy usage will be stored under Current Month TOU and is divided up into different tariffs. When next month (or counting period) starts, all Current

Month TOU values will be moved to Prior Month TOU.

There are two ways of automatic resetting of current month TOU.

1.End of Month: This is the default method. All values from Current Month TOU will be copied over to Prior Month TOU at the very beginning of each month (the frst day of eachmonth at time 00: 00: 00). Current Month TOU will be cleared and reset to 0.

2.Assigned Clock: User can select when the values from Current Month TOU would be copied over to Prior Month TOU. User can set the time in the following format “DD HH: MM: SS” - DD stands for day, HH stands for hour, MM stands for minute, SS stands forsecond. Similar to the previous method, once Current

Month TOU is transferred to Prior Month TOU, all values from Current Month

TOU will be cleared and reset to 0.

4.7 Power Quality Event Logging and Waveform Capture

Power Quality Event Logging

When a power quality event happens, such as voltage sag and swell, Acuvim IIW will record the event timestamp and the triggering condition. It can save up to

50,000 events.

1. Event Logging Data format

Timestamp (4 words) + Triggering Condition (1 word) + Rated Value (1 word) +

Threshold (1 word) + Half Cycle Count (1 word)

Each event has 8 words in total.

Event Time: W1: Year—High Byte; Month-Low Byte; W2:Day-High Byte, Hour—

Low Byte; W3:Minute—High Byte; Second—Low Byte; W4: Millisecond

Triggering Condition: W5—Voltage Sags or Voltage Swells 0: logging disabled;

Bit0: 1 – u1 voltage sag, 0 – no u1 voltage sag;

Bit1: 1 – u2 voltage sag, 0 – no u2 voltage sag;

Bit2: 1 – u3 voltage sag, 0 – no u3 voltage sag;

Bit3: 1 – u1 voltage swell, 0 –u1 no voltage swell;

Bit4: 1 – u2 voltage swell, 0 –u2 no voltage swell;

Bit5: 1 – u3 voltage swell, 0 –u3 no voltage swell;

Rated Value: W6—Voltage rated value;

Threshold: W7—Threshold for voltage sag and swell.

Half Cycle count: W8 (Voltage Swell: 0; Voltage Sag: 4—200)

2. Logging Events

The event logging feature can log 50000 events. If the 50000 events are full, no more events will be logged even if the triggering condition happens. The user

89

90 must clear the event log, and then the logging will log the new event. When the log is cleared, the new event will be logged from the first event happening.

There will be no data loss after the power is off.

3. Event Logging Triggering Conditions

1)Voltage Sag

When any phase of the three phase voltage is lower than the set value (voltage rated value x threshold %), there will be a voltage sag event. When one phase voltage sag happens, the other phase will not respond to voltage sag event logging. Only when all of the phases voltage restore back to normal, a new voltage sag event will be responded.

2)Voltage Swell

When any phase of the three phase voltage is higher than the set value (voltage rated value x threshold %), there will be an Voltage Swell event. When one phase Voltage Swell happens, the other phase will not respond to Voltage Swell event logging. Only when all of the phases voltage restore back to normal, a new Voltage Swell event will be responded.

Note:

The following figure depicts how to set the parameters for Power Quality Event

Logging and Waveform Capture. In the parameter settings, Voltage Sag and

Voltage Swell share the same voltage rated value. The parameters for event logging includes: voltage rated value, voltage sag threshold, voltage sag half cycle count and voltage swell threshold. Those parameters also fit voltage sag waveform capture. The other triggering conditions for Waveform Capture can be set when necessary. When the Waveform Capture triggering by Voltage Sag and Voltage Swell is enabled, the corresponding event log and waveform will be recorded when Voltage Sag or Voltage Swell happens.

Fig. 4-12

4. Event Log Retrieve

When a new event log commences, the newest event number address

(0X8CFDH)contains the newest event number. When the log is being retrieved, the starting event log number (0X8CFEH) and the event quantity for each retrieve (0X8CFF) must be set correctly. It must be ensured that the starting number of event log should equal or smaller than the newest log number.

When setup is correct, reading registers 0X8D00H—0X8D4FH will acquire the event log data. Each time a maximum of 10 logged events can be retrieved. The event log retrieve page is in the figure below. The Modbus register address of the event log is in the table below (see details in Chapter 6).

91

8CFDH

8CFEH

8CFFH

The newest event number

The starting event log number word word

The event quantity of each time retrieve word

R Range: 1~50000

0: No event

R/W Range: 1-50000

Note: smaller than or equal to the newest event number.

R/W 1-10

92

Fig. 4-13

Waveform Capture

Acuvim IIW can record 100 groups of voltage and current waveform data at a sampling rate of 64 points per cycle. It provides the captured waveform of 10 cycles before and after the triggering point (including U1,U2,U3,I1,I2,I3). The triggering condition is settable.

1. Waveform Capture Data Format

Timestamp(7 words)+ Triggering Condition(9 words)+ Kept Data Storage(48 words)+ U1, U2, U3, I1, I2, I3(Before triggering point 10 waveforms 64 x 10 x

6 words)+ U1, U2, U3, I1, I2, I3(After triggering point 10 waveforms 64x10x6 words).

Timestamp: Year( W1), Month( W2), Day( W3), Hour( W4), Minute( W5),

Second(W6), Millisecond(W7)

Triggering Condition:

W8—Manual Triggering (0: disable; 1: enable);

W9— AXM-11 DI Triggering (bit1bit0: DI1(bit3bit2: DI2)bit5bit4: DI3; bit7bit6:

DI4; bit9bit8: DI5; bit11bit10: DI6 );

W10—AXM-21 DI Triggering (bit1bit0: DI7; bit3bit2 : DI8; bit5bit4: DI9; bit7bit6:

DI10);

W11—AXM-31 DI Triggering (bit1bit0: DI11; bit3bit2 : DI12; bit5bit4: DI13; bit7bit6: DI14);

(Two bits meaning: 00: No DI Triggering; 01: DI Triggering from OFF to ON; 10: DI

Triggering From On to OFF)

W12— Voltage Sag Triggering(0: disabled;

Bit0: 1 – u1 voltage sag waveform, 0 – no u1 waveform;

Bit1: 1 – u2 voltage sag waveform, 0 – no u2 waveform;

Bit2: 1 – u3 voltage sag waveform, 0 – no u3 waveform)

W13— Voltage Swell Triggering(0: disabled;

Bit0: 1 – u1 voltage swell waveform, 0 – no u1 waveform;

Bit1: 1 – u2 voltage swell waveform, 0 – no u2 waveform;

Bit2: 1 – u3 voltage swell waveform, 0 – no u3 waveform;)

W14— Over-current Triggering(0: disabled;

93

94

Bit0: 1 – I1 voltage over-current waveform, 0 – no I1 waveform;

Bit1: 1 – I2 voltage over-current waveform, 0 – no I2 waveform;

Bit2: 1 – I3 voltage over-current waveform, 0 – no I3 waveform;)

W15,W16----0(Reserved)

Waveform Order:

Before triggering point 10 U1 waveforms, 10 U2 waveforms, 10 U3 waveforms,

10 I1 waveforms, 10 I2 waveforms, 10 I3 waveforms.

After triggering point 10 U1 waveforms, 10 U2 waveforms, 10 U3 waveforms, 10

I1 waveforms, 10 I2 waveforms, 10 I3 waveforms.

2. Waveform Capture Group

Waveform Capture can log up to 100 groups of waveform data. When the 100 group data is full, it does not respond to any waveform triggering condition.

Only when all the waveform data is reset / emptied, waveform capturing function will be normal. When the waveform data is emptied, new waveform data starts from the 1st group. The waveform data will not be lost when the power is off.

Note: since the amount of each waveform group data is large, it takes more time to write into the flash memory. Therefore, Waveform Capture only responds to one triggering condition at one time. During the process of writing data into the flash memory, it does not respond to new triggering condition. After the process of memory writing, it will respond to new waveform triggering condition.

3. Waveform Capture Triggering Condition

1) Manual Triggering

Manually trigger one group waveform capture.

2) DI Triggering

DI Triggering must fulfill the following two conditions at the same time.

•IO modules with the logical address of 1 (AXM-IO11, AXM-IO21, AXM-IO31).

•DI channel type is set as “State”.

The Modbus address assigns two bits for the DI channel. When they are set as “00”, it means DI Triggering Disabled; “01” means DI Triggering will be implemented when DI state changes from OFF to ON; “10” means DI Triggering will be implemented when DI state changes from ON to OFF; “11 “means DI

Triggering will be implemented when DI state has any change.

3) Voltage Sag Triggering

As mentioned in Voltage Sag event logging, when Voltage Sag Triggering

Waveform is enabled, both event logging and waveform capture will be implemented at the same time once a voltage sag happens.

4) Voltage Swell Triggering

As mentioned in Voltage Swell event logging, when Voltage Swell Triggering

Waveform is enabled, both event logging and waveform capture will be implemented at the same time once a voltage swell happens.

5) Over-current Triggering

When Over-current Triggering is enabled, if any phase of the three phase current is higher than the set value (rated value x thredshold %), the waveform capture will be implemented. If one phase is over-current, any other phase overcurrent cannot implement the waveform capture. Only when all of the phase current restore back to normal, waveform capture will be responding.

4. Waveform Capture Retrieve

Because of large quantity of saved waveform, waveform retrieving window use 64 addresses to make retrieving data easier, which keeps consistent with

95

96 recording points of one period. There are two retrieving methods, one retrieve waveform record reasons, another retrieve all data of one group waveform. Two methods are shown below.

First retrieving method is only retrieving waveform record reasons.

When 0x8E01H (Waveform Group Number) is set to 0, waveform record reason can be retrieved from data retrieving window, by changing Waveform Group

Number for Retrieving (8E00H). Waveform record reason is 16 bytes and data window are 64 bytes, so that is the reason why each retrieving access include 4 group records.

For example, if the total number of Waveform Group Number for Retrieving is

19, the by this method, only through 5 times retrieving, all 20 groups waveform can be retrieved. Before retrieving, user should write 0 to 8E01H, and 1 to 8E00H, while at first time retrieving addresses from 8E00 to 8E43, these window data are the reasons of waveform group 1, 2, 3, 4. After retrieving, Waveform Group

Number for Retrieving (8E00H) will automatically update to 5. While at second time retrieving addresses from 8E00 to 8E43, these window data are the reasons of waveform group 5, 6, 7, 8. Waveform Group Number for Retrieving (8E00H) will stop increasing after the value reaches 17.

Note: Unless user retrieves all data from 8E00H to 8E43H in one time, Waveform

Group Number for Retrieving (8E00H) will automatically add 4, otherwise

Waveform Group Number for Retrieving (8E00H) will keep present value if only retrieving partial data. Waveform Group Number for Retrieving (8E00H) will stop increasing while value reaches Newest Waveform Group Number. If the value added 4, the value will be larger than Newest Waveform Group Number.

Second retrieving method is retrieving all waveforms data. When 0x8E01H

(Waveform Group Number) is set to 1~121, each time only one group data of each number will be retrieved, then Waveform Group Number for Retrieving

(8E01H) will automatically add 1 after retrieving. At next time, new Waveform

Group Number will be retrieved. Waveform Group Number will stop increasing after value reach 121.

Note: The range of 0x8E01H is 0~121, within setting range, windows

(8E04H~8E43H) are corresponding to waveform data.

0: Only retrieving waveform record reasons

1: Time and reasons of waveforms

2~11: Each waveform number of ten waveforms before U1 waveform is triggered

12~21: Each waveform number of ten waveforms before U2 waveform is triggered

22~31: Each waveform number of ten waveforms before U3 waveform is triggered

32~41: Each waveform number of ten waveforms before I1 waveform is triggered

42~51: Each waveform number of ten waveforms before I2 waveform is triggered

52~61: Each waveform number of ten waveforms before I3 waveform is triggered

62~71: Each waveform number of ten waveforms after U1 waveform is triggered

72~81: Each waveform number of ten waveforms after U2 waveform is triggered

82~91: Each waveform number of ten waveforms after U3 waveform is triggered

92~101: Each waveform number of ten waveforms after I1 waveform is triggered

102~111: Each waveform number of ten waveforms after I2 waveform is triggered

112~121: Each waveform number of ten waveforms after I3 waveform is

97

98 triggered

Note: Unless user retrieves all data from 8E00H to 8E43H in one time, Waveform

Group Number for Retrieving (8E01H) will automatically add 1, or Waveform

Group Number for Retrieving (8E01H) will keep present value if only retrieving partial data.

8E00H

8E01H

8E02H

8E03H

8E04H-

8E43H

____

Waveform Group

Number for Retrieving

Waveform Group

Number

Waveform record window status

Newest Waveform

Group Number

Waveform record data retrieving window

1~100

Note: When the value is smaller than or equal to newest waveform record group number, this value is valid.

Waveform number

0~121

0x0BH: window data is valid.

0xFF: window data is invalid.

0xAA: waveform record memory is clearing(data is invalid)

1~100

0~no record

-32768~ 32767

5. Relationship between voltage or current waveform value and real value

The relationship between voltage waveform value and real value:

Real Value (Unit: V) = Waveform Value / 37.59105

The relationship between current waveform value and real value:

Real Value (Unit: A) = Waveform Value / 1683.153

When users select 333mV Voltage type CT,real Value(Unit :A) = Waveform

Value/15869.87.

The voltage and current value obtained from the waveform are the PT or CT secondary side value.

The waveform capture retrieve page is shown in Figure 4-14.

Fig. 4-14

99

4.8 Seal Function

The panel with seal, which has sealed key control, is different with one without seal. When the seal is in opened status, functions are same like normal meters.

But when the seal is in sealed status, some functions of meters, which include parameters blocked by seal and optional parameters, will be blocked. These parameters can still be accessible by keys and communication way if they can be accessed before, but in sealed status, these parameters cannot be modified by keys or communication way any more.

Addresses about seal function are 101EH and 101FH.

Address 101EH is about parameters blocked by seal, which can be configured by users. These setting will be valid only when seal is in sealed status.

Address 101FH is about if seal function is valid. When the panel is normal one, or the seal panel is in invalid sealed status, this address will show seal is open.

When the seal is valid, this address will show sealed status and corresponding parameters will be blocked.

101EH

101FH

Sealed Nonstandard

Parameters Selection

Seals status

Bit0: 1st communication parameters

Bit1: 2nd communication parameters

Bit2: run time clear

Bit3: DI pulse count

Bit4:TOU

1: valid of corresponding selection

0: invalid

0x0A: Seal sealed; Other: Seal opened.

Parameters blocked by seal

As long as seal is in sealed status, parameters below must be blocked, no matter what value of address 101EH.

100

System parameters setting:

Address

1003H

1004H

1005H

1006H

1007H

1008H

1009H

100AH

100BH

100DH

100EH

100FH

1012H

1013H

1014H

1015H

1016H

1017H

1018H

1019H

101DH

101EH

Parameter

Voltage input wiring type

Current input wiring type

PT1(High 16 bit)

PT1(Low 16 bit)

PT2

CT1

CT2 kWh pulse constant

Kvarh pulse constant

Demand slid window time

Demand calculating mode

Clear demand memory

Current I1 direction

Current I2 direction

Current I3 direction

VAR/PF convention

Energy clear

Energy calculating mode

Reactive power measuring mode

Energy display mode

Basic parameter mode

Sealed Nonstandard

Parameters Selection

Keys

-

Communication

Note: “√” means these addresses will be blocked for keys and communication, and”-“ means this function is unavailable.

101

102

Energy:

Address

4048H--4049H

404AH--404BH

404CH--404DH

404EH--404FH

4050H--4051H

4052H--4053H

4054H--4055H

4056H--4057H

4058H--4059H

DO:

Address

10A5H

10A6H

10A7H

10A8H

10B7H

10B8H

10B9H

10BAH

Parameter

Energy IMP

Energy EXP

Reactive energy IMP

Reactive energy EXP

Energy TOTAL

Energy NET

Reactive energy TOTAL

Reactive energy NET

Apparent energy

Parameter

Working mode of DO 1 and 2

DO pulse width

DO1 output

DO2 output

Working mode of DO 3 and 4

DO pulse width

DO3 output

DO4 output

-

-

-

-

Keys

-

-

-

-

-

Display Panel and Keys

Communication

Communication

Sealed Nonstandard Parameters:

1) When bit 0 of address 101EH is valid, parameters about 1 st

communication should be blocked.

Address

0FFEH

0FFFH

1000H

1001H

1002H

Parameter

Communication Protocol 1

Parity Setting 1

Password

Communication address 1

Baud rate 1

Keys

Communication

2) When bit 1 of address 101EH is valid, parameters about 2nd communication should be blocked.

Address

102FH

1030H

1031H

Ethernet Module

Parameter

Baud rate2

Parity Setting 2

Communication address 2

Keys

Communication

DHCP setting

IP address 1st byte (high)

IP address 2nd byte (low)

IP address 3rd byte (high)

IP address 4th byte (low)

Submask 1st byte (high)

Submask 2nd byte (low)

Submask 3rd byte (high)

Submask 4th byte (low)

Gateway 1st byte (high)

Gateway 2nd byte (low)

Gateway 3rd byte (high)

Gateway 4th byte (low)

DNS1 1st byte (high)

DNS1 2nd byte (low)

DNS1 3rd byte (high)

DNS1 4th byte (low)

DNS2 1st byte (high)

DNS2 2nd byte (low)

DNS2 3rd byte (high)

DNS2 4th byte (low)

Modbus Tcp/Ip port

Http port

BACnet Module

BACnet module enable

DHCP setting

103

104

IP address 1st byte (high)

IP address 2nd byte (low)

IP address 3rd byte (high)

IP address 4th byte (low)

Submask 1st byte (high)

Submask 2nd byte (low)

Submask 3rd byte (high)

Submask 4th byte (low)

Gateway 1st byte (high)

Gateway 2nd byte (low)

Gateway 3rd byte (high)

Gateway 4th byte (low)

DNS1 1st byte (high)

DNS1 2nd byte (low)

DNS1 3rd byte (high)

DNS1 4th byte (low)

DNS2 1st byte (high)

DNS2 2nd byte (low)

DNS2 3rd byte (high)

DNS2 4th byte (low)

MAC address

BACnet baud rate

Max info frames

BACnet Port

PROFIBUS Module

PROFIBUS address √ -

3) When bit 2 of address 101EH is valid, parameters below should be blocked.

Address

1011H

Parameter

Run time clear

Keys

Communication

4) When bit 3 of address 101EH is valid, parameters below should be blocked.

Address

101CH

Parameter

Pulse counter clear

Keys

Communication

109eH

109fH

10a3H

10a4H

10aaH

10abH

10b0H

10b1H

10b5H

10b6H

10bcH

10bdH

DI1-6 type

DI pulse constant

DI7-10 type

DI pulse constant

DI11-14 type

DI pulse constant

DI15-20 type

DI pulse constant

DI21-24 type

DI pulse constant

DI25-28 type

DI pulse constant

5) When bit 4 of address 101EH is valid, parameters below should be blocked.

Address

103fH

1040H

1041H

1042H

1043H

1044H

1045H

Parameter

Week

Year

Month

Day

Hour

Minute

Second -

-

-

-

Keys

-

-

-

Communication

Note: Standard time is valid within ±5 minutes, it will be invalid if not in this range.

TOU

Address

1039H

103aH

103bH

103cH

103dH

103eH

Parameter

Ten years download setting enable

Fee of sharp demand clear

Fee of peak demand clear

Fee of valley demand clear

Fee of normal demand clear

Total fee of demand clear

Keys

-

-

-

-

-

-

Communication

105

106

Current and last month TOU energy

7200H-7263H Current and last month TOU energy

DST setting

7700H-7717H DST setting

Season setting

7800H-780EH

7820H-7AECH

Ten years holiday setting

7B00H-7E97H

Basis parameter of TOU

Season setting

Ten years holiday setting

-

-

-

-

-

Chapter 5 Extended Modules

5.1 IO Modules

5.2 Ethernet Module (AXM-NET)

5.3 ProfiBus Module (AXM-PRO)

5.4 RS485 Module (AXM-485)

5.5 BACnet Module (AXM-BACnet)

107

5.1 IO Modules

5.1.1 The Purpose of IO Modules

The standard Acuvim II meter base does not have any built-in IO functions.

However, with the addition of the extended modules, multiple IO options can be added. These functions include digital input, pulse counter, relay output, analog output, analog input, etc.

There are three types of IO modules, AXM-IO1, AXM-IO2 and AXM-IO3.

Please note that a maximum of 3 modules may be attached to the meter. If a communication module is used, it must be installed on the back of the meter first before any IO modules are attached. No more than 2 of the same type IO modules can be attached. According to the diference in communication with

Acuvim II meter, each type of IO module also has two modes, logic NO.1 and logic NO.2. This means, two of each type of IO module can be linked to the

Acuvim II meter simutaneously (one being logic NO.1 and the other being logic

NO.2).

The AXM-IO1 module is composed of:

6 digital inputs (DI) -- Each digital input can be used to detect remote signals, or be used as an input pulse counter. When it is used to detect remote signals, it also can enable SOE(sequence of events), recording the event and time of the event.

2 relay outputs (RO) -- Can be used for controlling or alarming. Each of the relay outputs work in the same mode. When it operates in controlling mode, there are two output options; latching and pulse. When it operates in alarm mode, it has only one latching output mode.

24V isolated power supply -- Used as an auxiliary power supply for digital inputs.

108

The AXM-IO2 module is composed of:

4 digital inputs (DI) -- Each digital input can be used to detect remote signals, or be used an input pulse counter. When it is used to detect remote signals it can also enable SOE(sequence of events), recording the events and time of the events.

2 analog outputs (AO) -- Can output analog voltage or analog current. When it outputs analog voltage, the range of voltage is from 0 to 5V or from 1 to 5V.

When it outputs analog current, the range of current is from 0 to 20mA or from

4 to 20mA.

2 digital outputs (DO) -- Can be used in alarm mode or energy pulse output mode. Both of the digital outputs work in the same mode. When it operates in energy pulse output mode, it can output various types of energy.

The AXM-IO3 module is composed of:

4 digital inputs (DI) -- Each digital input can be used to detect remote signals, or be used as an input pulse counter. When it is used to detect remote signals it can also enable SOE(sequence of events), recording the events and time of the events.

2 relay outputs (RO) -- Can be used for controlling or alarming. Each of the relay outputs work in the same mode. When it operates in controlling mode, there are two output options; latching mode and pulse . When it operates in alarm mode, it has only one latching output mode.

2 analog inputs (AI) -- Can detect input analog voltage or analog current. When it detects input analog voltage, the range of voltage is from 0 to 5V or from 1 to

5V. When it detects input analog current, the range of current is from 0 to 20mA or from 4 to 20mA.

109

110

5.1.2 List of Functions of IO Modules

Functions

Detection of remote signals

Recording of SOE

Counting of input pulses

Output remote controlling by relay

Output alarm by relay

Output alarm by digital output

Output power pulses by digital output

Analog output

Analog input

24V isolated voltage output

AXM-IO1 AXM-IO2 AXM-IO3

6

5.1.3 Appearance and Dimensions

90.00

5

1

3

7

2

4

5

3

4

1

2

Enclosure

Wiring Terminals

Linking pins

Linking socket

5

6

7

Installation screw

Counterpart of clip

Installation clip

Fig 5-1 Dimensions

5.1.4 Installation Method

Environment

Please verify the installation environment meets the requirements listed as follows:

111

112 follows:

(delete this)

Temperature

Operation: -25ºC to 70ºC

Storage: -40ºC to 85ºC

Humidity

5% to 95% non-condensing.

Location

The Acuvim II meter and IO modules should be installed in a dry and dust free environment avoiding heat, radiation and high electrical noise sources.

Installation Method

With the link pins, IO modules are linked to the meter and to each other. The maximum number of extended modules linked to Acuvim II meter, including

IO module, Ethernet module, Profibus module, RS-485 module and BACnet module, is three. The communication modules must be installed first. No other module can be installed before them.

1. Insert the installation clips to the counterpart of Acuvim II meter, and then press the IO module lightly, so linking is established.

2. Tighten the installation screws.

3. Install other IO modules the same way.

Note: 1. Install IO Modules carefully to avoid damage;

2. Under no circumstances should any installation be done with the meter powered on. Failure to do so may result in injury or death.

Fig 5-2 Installation of IO modules

5.1.5 Wiring of IO Modules

Terminal strips of AXM-IO1 modul

Digital Input Relay Output VDC

DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DIC RO1 RO2 ROC V+ V–

Fig 5-3 Terminal strips of AXM-IO1 module

DI1 to DIC: digital input terminals, where DIC is the common terminal for DI1 to

DI6 circuits.

RO1 to ROC: relay output terminals, where ROC is the common terminal for RO1 and RO2 circuits.

V24+ and V24-: auxiliary voltage supply terminals.

113

Terminal Strips of AXM-IO2 Module:

Digital Input Analog Output Digital Output

DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DIC AO1+ AO1– AO2+ AO2– DO1 DO2 DOC

Fig 5-4 Terminal strips of AXM-IO2 module

DI1 to DIC: digital input terminals, where DIC is the common terminal for DI1 to

DI4 circuits.

AO1+, AO1-, AO2+, AO2-: analog output terminals.

DO1 to DOC: digital output terminals, where DOC is the common terminals for

DO1 to DO2.

Terminals strips of AXM-IO3 module:

Digital Input Relay Output Analog Input

114

DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4

DIC RO1 RO2 ROC AI1+ AI1– AI2+ AI2–

Fig 5-5 Terminal strips of AXM-IO3 module

DI1 to DIC: digital input terminals, where DIC is the common terminal for DI1 to

DI4 circuits.

RO1 to ROC: relay output terminals, where ROC is the common terminal for RO1 and RO2 circuits.

AI1+, AI1-, AI2+, AI2-: analog input terminals.

Sequence of DI, RO, DO, AO, AI in IO modules (according to the logical order in the communication address table of the main body):

DI Sequence: AXM-IO11 (AXM-IO1 module in logic NO.1): DI1-6

AXM-IO21 (AXM-IO2 module in logic NO.1): DI7-10

AXM-IO31 (AXM-IO3 module in logic NO.1): DI11-14

AXM-IO12 (AXM-IO1 module in logic NO.2): DI15-20

AXM-IO22 (AXM-IO2 module in logic NO.2): DI21-24

AXM-IO32 (AXM-IO3 module in logic NO.2): DI25-28

RO Sequence: AXM-IO11 (AXM-IO1 module in logic NO.1): RO1-2

AXM-IO31 (AXM-IO3 module in logic NO.1): RO3-4

AXM-IO12 (AXM-IO1 module in logic NO.2): RO5-6

AXM-IO32 (AXM-IO3 module in logic NO.2): RO7-8

DO Sequence: AXM-IO21 (AXM-IO2 module in logic NO.1): DO1-2

AXM-IO22 (AXM-IO2 module in logic NO.2):DO3-4

AO Sequence: AXM-IO21 (AXM-IO2 module in logic NO.1): AO1-2

AXM-IO22 (AXM-IO2 module in logic NO.2): AO3-4

AI Sequence: AXM-IO31 (AXM-IO3 module logic NO.1): AI1-2

AXM-IO32 (AXM-IO3 module in logic NO.2): AI3-4

Wiring of Digital Input Circuit:

There are 6 digital input circuits, 4 digital input circuits and 4 digital input

115

116 circuits in AXM-IO1, AXM-IO2 and AXM-IO3 modules respectively. The digital input circuit can be used to detect remote signals, or be used as an input pulse counter.

K

DIn

Optical coupler

VCC

R

OUT

Electrical

Adjuster

DIC

IO module

Fig 5-6 schematic diagram of digital input circuit

The circuit drawing of digital input is simplified as shown in Figure 5-6. When K is switched off, OUT is in high state. When K is switched on, OUT is in low state.

The external power supply for the digital input is 20-160 Vad/Vdc. The max current in the loop line is 2mA.

The wire of digital input should be chosen between AWG22~16 or 0.5~ 1.3mm

2

.

Wiring of Relay Output Circuit:

There are 2 relay output circuits in AXM-IO1 and AXM-IO3 modules respectively.

The relay output circuit can work in controlling state, or an alarm state. When it operates in controlling state, it has two optional output modes, latching and pulse . When it operates in alarm state, it has only one latching output mode.

Relay type is mechanical Form A contact with 3A/250Vac or 3A/30Vdc. A mediate relay is recommended in the output circuit as in Figure 5-7.

IO module

ROn

External power supply coil

mediate relay control output

ROC

Fig 5-7 schematic diagram of relay output circuit

The wire of relay output should be chosen between AWG22~16 or 0.5~1.3mm

2

.

Wiring of Digital Output Circuit:

There are 2 digital output circuits in AXM-IO2 module. The digital output circuit can work in alarm state, or work in energy pulse output state.

Digital output circuit form is Photo-MOS. The simplified circuit is shown in

Figure 5-8

VCC

J

Photo-MOS

DO1

OUT

+

Power Supply

DOC

IO Module

Fig 5-8 schematic diagram of digital output circuit 1

117

When J is in low state as shown in Figure 5-8, OUT is in low state. When J is in high state, OUT is in high state. OUT can therefore output pulse signals under the control of J.

The max output voltage and current of digital output circuit are 250V and

100mA respectively.

Another drawing of the alarming output with buzzer is shown in Figure 5-9.

VCC

Buzzer

DO1

Photo-MOS

External

Power Supply

AC/DC

J

DOC

IO Module

Fig 5-9 schematic diagram of digital output circuit 2

The wire of the digital output circuit should be chosen between AWG22~16 or

0.5~1.3 mm

2

.

Wiring of Analog Output Circuit:

There are 2 analog output circuits in AXM-IO2 modules. The terminals of the analog output circuits are AO1+, AO1- and AO2+, AO2-. The analog output circuit can convert any one of 30 electrical quantities, which is selected by user, to analog voltage or current. The analog output circuit supplies 4 output modes, including 0 to 20mA mode, 4 to 20mA mode, 0 to 5V mode and 1 to 5V mode.

118

The simplified circuit is as shown in Figure 5-10.

VO

VCC

AO+ load

AO-

VO

VCC

AO+

R

R1

R2 load

AO-

Current analog output Voltage analog output

Fig 5-10 schematic diagram of analog output circuit

The Load Capability of Analog Output Circuit:

0 to 20mA mode: the max load resistance is 500Ω.

4 to 20mA mode: the max load resistance is 500Ω.

0 to 5V mode: the max load current is 20mA.

1 to 5V mode: the max load current is 20mA.

Wiring of Analog Input Circuit:

There are 2 analog input circuits in AXM-IO3 modules. The terminals of analog input circuit are AI1+, AI1- and AI2+, AI2-. The analog input circuit supplies 4 input modes, including 0 to 20mA mode, 4 to 20mA mode, 0 to 5V mode and 1 to 5V mode.

The simplified circuit is as shown in Figure 5-11.

119

120

AI+

AI-

R

C

ADC

VI

AI+

R

2

R

1

AI-

C

ADC

VI

Current analog input Voltage analog input

Fig 5-11 schematic diagram of analog input circuit

24V Isolated Power Supply:

To simplify and make more convenient for the end user, there is a DI auxiliary power supply provided in AXM-IO1 module. The voltage of the DI auxiliary power supply is 24Vdc (1W). This power supply can NOT be used for other purposes.

Figure 5-12 shows the function of IO modules, which is displayed in the utility software as follows, where AXM-IO12 (AXM-IO1 module in logic NO.2), AXM-

IO22 (AXM-IO2 module in logic NO.2) and AXM-IO32 (AXM-IO3 module in logic

NO.2) are linked to Acuvim II meter.

Fig 5-12 functions of IO modules

5.1.6

Detection of Remote Signals

The digital input circuit can be set to detect remote signals.

a. Detection of Remote Signals

When digital input circuit detects a qualified voltage input, it will show “1” on screen and “ON” in utility software. Otherwise, it will show “0” on screen and “OFF” in utility software.

121

Fig 5-13 showing DI state on screen

b. Record of SOE

When the digital input circuit is set to detect remote signals, the recording function of SOE can be enabled. Therefore, when the remote signals change, the IO module can record this information accordingly.

SOE Record: including “4399H to 4439H” address registers. “4399H to 4438H” address registers record 20 groups of SOE records. “4439H” records the IO module which generates the SOE records. For example, if register “4439H” is 1, the 20 groups of SOE records are all generated by AXM-IO11 (AXM-IO1 module in logic NO.1).

The 20 groups of SOE records are arranged based on time. When more than 20 groups of SOE records are generated, the records will begin at the first one.

When the Acuvim II meter is powered on, the SOE begins to record immediately.

The data in the SOE records will not be lost if the meter is powered off. When the enabled SOE function is changed, the records will be lost.

122

All groups of SOE records are in the same format. Take the first group of SOE records for example, “4399H to 439fH” registers record the time information, including year, month, day, hour, minute, second and millisecond. “43a0H” register records the state information, which is an unsigned integer, where bit 0 records DI1 state, bit 1 records DI2 state, and so on. For example, if “43a0H” is “1”, it means that DI1 is “1”, and others are all “0”.

Note: If one of digital input circuits is set to be a pulse counter when the IO module is SOE enabled, then the counterpart bit of “43a0H” register will always be “0”.

Data of SOE records can only be read by the utility software, it cannot be read on screen.

Figure 5-14 shows the data information of SOE records of AXM-IO12 (AXM-IO1 module in logic NO.2) read by the utility software.

Fig 5-14 data information of SOE records read by the utility software

123

124

c. Parameter Setting of Detection of Remote Signals

Take parameter setting of AXM-IO11 (AXM-IO1 module in logic NO.1) for example.

“109eH” register: this register is an unsigned integer, where bit0 determines

DI1’s working mode, bit1 determines DI2’s working mode, and so on. If the bit is “1”, then the DI circuit is set to be a pulse counter. Otherwise, the DI circuit is set to detect remote signals. Figure 5-13 shows the parameter setting of digital input circuits.

“101bH” register: this register is an unsigned integer, it determines that which

IO module will be SOE enabled. If register is “0”, then any IO module is SOE disabled. If register is “1”, then AXM-IO11 (AXM-IO1 module in logic NO.1) is SOE enabled. If register is “2”, then AXM-IO21 (AXM-IO2 module in logic NO.1) is SOE enabled. If register is “3”, then AXM-IO31 (AXM-IO3 module in logic NO.1) is

SOE enabled. If register is “4”, then AXM-IO12 (AXM-IO1 module in logic NO.2) is

SOE enabled. If register is “5”, then AXM-IO22 (AXM-IO2 module in logic NO.2) is SOE enabled. If register is “6”, then AXM-IO32 (AXM-IO3 module in logic

NO.2) is SOE enabled. Only one IO module can be SOE enabled at one time. If the IO module is not linked to the Acuvim II power meter, then there is no need to enable SOE function in the software.

Figure 5-15 shows the parameters setting of IO module’s SOE function.

Fig 5-15 parameters setting of IO module’s SOE function

5.1.7

Pulse Counter

The digital input circuit can also be set to count pulses.

Recorded number of pulses: including “4349H to 4380H” address The “4349H to

4380H” registers record 28 groups of individual number of individual number of pulses. This includes 6 groups of records for AXM-IO11 (AXM-IO1 module in logic

125

NO.1), 4 groups of records for AXM-IO21 (AXM-IO2 module in logic NO.1), 4 groups of records for AXM-IO31 (AXM-IO3 module in logic NO.1), 6 groups of records for AXM-IO12 (AXM-IO1 module in logic NO.2), 4 groups of records for

AXM-IO22 (AXM-IO2 module in logic NO.2) and 4 groups of records for AXM-

IO32 (AXM-IO3 module in logic NO.2) in sequence. One group of records is an unsigned long integer, for example, “4349H to 434aH” registers record the number of pulses for DI1 circuit of AXM-IO11 (AXM-IO1 module in logic NO.1).

Figure 5-16 shows the recorded number of pulses read on screen.

126

Fig 5-16 recorded number of pulses read on the screen

Figure 5-17 shows the recorded number of pulses read by the utility software.

Fig 5-17 recorded number of pulses read by the utility software

Parameter Settings for Counting Input Pulses:

Take AXM-IO11 (AXM-IO1 module in logic NO.1) for example.

1. “109eH” register: if the bit is set as “1”, the counterpart digital input circuit is set to be a counter of input pulses.

2. “109fH” register: this register is an unsigned integer. If this register is A , and the digital input circuit is set to be a pulse counter, then the real number of pulses counted by this DI circuit will be as follows:

127

128

Real number of pulses = A × Recorded number of pulses.

For example, if A=20, the recorded number of pulses counted by DI1 circuit of

AXM-IO11 is 100 (4349H to 434aH registers), then the real number of pulses is

20×100=2000.

The parameter setting is shown in Figure 5-13.

5.1.8 Relay Output

Relays in IO modules can work in two different modes, one is controlling mode, and the other is alarm mode. For controlling mode, relays can be switched on and off directly. For alarm mode, the action of relays is controlled by whether the alarm has occurred or not.

There are two mode selections for relay output, one is latching, and the other is pulse. For the latching mode, the relay can be used to output two status on or off. For the pulse mode, the output of the relay changes from off to on for a period of time and then goes off. The period can be set from 50 to 3000ms.

Note: when relay is working in alarm mode, the default output mode is latching mode.

a. Display of Relay State

If relay state is “ON”, it means that relay is switched on. If relay state is “OFF”, it means that relay is switched off.

Figure 5-18 shows the status of relays read on screen.

Figure 5-12 shows the status of relays read by the utility software.

Fig 5-18 status of relays read on screen

b. Parameter Setting

Take AXM-IO11 (AXM-IO1 module in logic NO.1) for example.

“RO working mode (10a0H)” register: this register determines the working mode of relays. If the register is “0”, then RO1 and RO2 will work in controlling mode. If the register is “1”, then RO1 and RO2 will work in alarm mode.

“RO output mode (10a1H)” register: this register determines the output mode of relays. If the register is “0”, then RO1 and RO2 will work in latching output mode. If the register is “1”, then RO1 and RO2 will work in pulse output mode.

“RO pulse width (10a2H)” register: when the relays are working in pulse mode, this register determines the period of time which can be set from 50 to 3000ms. For example, if this register is “100”, the relay (RO1 or RO2) will be switched on for 100ms after receiving ON instruction and then be switched off.

The parameter setting is shown in Figure 5-13.

129

130

5.1.9 Digital Output

There are two mode selections for the digital output circuit; one being alarm mode, and the other being energy output mode. For alarm mode, action of digital output circuit is controlled by whether the alarm is triggered or not. For energy output mode, digital output circuits can output various types of energy, such as import active energy, export active energy, import reactive energy and export reactive energy. When outputting energy pulses, pulse width can be set from 20 to 1000ms. The minimum interval between two pulses is 20ms.

Parameter Setting:

Take AXM-IO21 (AXM-IO2 module in logic NO.1) for example.

“DO working mode (10a5H)” register: this register determines the working mode of DO circuits. If the register is “0”, then DO1 and DO2 will work in energy output mode. If the register is “1”, then DO1 and DO2 will work in alarm mode.

“DO pulse width (10a6H)” register: when DO circuits work in energy output mode, this register determines the width of energy pulses.

“DO1 output type (10a7H)” register: when DO circuits work in energy output mode, this register determines the energy output type for DO1. If this register is “0”, DO1 outputs nothing. If this register is “1”, DO1 outputs import active energy. If this register is “2”, DO1 outputs export active energy. If this register is “3”, DO1 outputs import reactive energy. If this register is “4”, DO1 outputs export reactive energy.

“DO2 output type (10a8H)” register: when DO circuits work in energy output mode, this register determines the energy output type for DO2. The value of this register is defined as the same as “DO1 output type” register.

“DO1 output type” register and “DO2 output type” register can be set to the same value or not.

The parameter setting is shown in Figure 5-19.

Fig 5-19 parameter setting of DO energy pulse constant

131

5.1.10 Analog Output

1. Analog Output Relationship with Electrical Quantities

The analog output circuit can convert anyone of 30 electrical quantities

(reference Chapter 6), which is selected by user, to analog voltage or current.

The analog output circuit supplies 4 output modes, including 0 to 20mA mode,

4 to 20mA mode, 0 to 5V mode and 1 to 5V mode.

Figure 5-20 shows the relationship between analog output and various electrical quantities.

132

Fig 5-20 Relationship between analog output and various electrical quantities

Note: Following part introduce how AO function works.

Addresses about AO function are from 10D0H to 10F3H, which include three groups parameters, such as Gradient Number, AO following value range, AO output range.

1) AO Gradient Number Selection of input/output transfer curve

When number is 1, which includes (X1, Y1) and (X4, Y4), only AO following value range setting start point, AO following value range setting end point,

AO1 output range setting start point and AO1 output range setting end point should be set.

When number is 2, which includes (X1, Y1), (X2, Y2) and (X4, Y4), only AO following value range setting start point, AO1 following value range setting point 2, AO following value range setting end point, AO1 output range setting start point , AO1 output range setting point 2 and AO1 output range setting end point should be set.

When number is 3, which includes (X1, Y1), (X2, Y2) , (X3, Y3) and (X4, Y4), only

AO following value range setting start point, AO1 following value range setting point 2, AO1 following value range setting point 3 and AO following value range setting end point should be set. At the same time, AO1 output range setting start point, AO1 output range setting point 2, AO1 output range setting point 3 and AO1 output range setting end point should be set.

2) Following value range setting:

AO following value range setting start point (X1), AO1 following value range setting point 2 (X2), AO1 following value range setting point 3 (X3) and AO following value range setting end point (X4) are increasing value, while they should be within range of AO following value. Otherwise, the function of AO will be affected.

Frequency: 45HZ~65HZ, real setting value is 4500~6500.

Phase voltage V1, V2, V3 and average phase voltage: 0~480V, real setting value is 0~4800.

Line voltage V12, V23, V31 and average line voltage: 0~831V, real setting value is 0~8310.

Current I1, I2, I3 and average current: 0~10A, real setting value is 0~10000.

Power Pa, Pb and Pc: -4800~4800W, real setting value is -4800~4800

System power: -14400~14400W, real setting value is -14400~14400.

133

134

Reactive power Qa, Qb and Qc: -4800~4800 Var, real setting value is-

4800~4800.

System reactive power: -14400~14400 Var.

Apparent power Sa, Sb and Sc: 0~4800VA, real setting value is 0~4800.

System apparent power: 0~14400VA, real setting value is 0~14400.

Power factor PFa, PFb, PFc and System power factor: -1~1, real setting value is

-1000~1000.

3) AO output range setting:

AO output value range setting start point (Y1), AO1 output value range setting point 2 (Y2), AO1 output value range setting point 3 (Y3) and AO output value range setting end point (Y4) are increasing value, while they should be within range of AO output value.

When AO type is 0~20mA, the corresponding range is 0~24mA, the setting value range is 0~ 4915, and the relationship is mA=setting value*20/4096.

When AO type is 4~20mA, the corresponding range is 4~24mA, the setting value range is 819~ 4915, and the relationship is mA=setting value*20/4096.

When AO type is 0~5V, the corresponding range is 0~6V, the setting value range is 0~ 4915, and the relationship is V=setting value*5/4096.

When AO type is 1~5V, the corresponding range is 1~6V, the setting value range is 819~ 4915, and the relationship is V=setting value*5/4096.

Please note: a> If the voltage input wiring of the meter is 2LL or 3LL, then the analog outpus relative to phase voltage, neutral current, phase active/reactive/apparent

power and phase power factor will always be 0.

b> The maximum of analog output is 1.2 times the range.

2. Display of Analog Output

Value of analog output is displayed in hex on screen. The relationship between displayed value and real value of analog output is:

Displayed Value

4096

As shown in Figure 5-21, the displayed value of AO1 is 0x0800, so the real value of AO1 is (0x0800/4096) ×5V or (0x800/4096) ×20mA.

Fig 5-21 AO value read on screen

3. Parameter Setting

Take AXM-IO21 (AXM-IO2 module in logic NO.1) for example.

135

136

“Electrical quantities relative to AO1 (10c2H)” register: this register determines which electrical quantity AO1 should be relative to. (see Chapter 6 for explaination). For example, if this register is “0”, then AO1 is relative to

“Frequency”.

“Electrical quantities relative to AO2 (10c3H)” register: this register determines which electrical quantity AO2 should be relative to. The value of this register is defined as the same as “Electrical quantities relative to AO1 (10c2H)” register.

“Electrical quantities relative to AO1 (10c2H)” register and “Electrical quantities relative to AO2 (10c3H)” register can be set to the same value .

The parameter setting is shown in Figure 5-22

Fig 5-22 Parameter setting of IO modules

137

5.1.11 Analog Input

Analog input circuits supply 4 types of input modes, including 0 to 20mA mode,

4 to 20mA mode, 0 to 5V mode, and 1 to 5V mode.

Figure 5-23 shows the relationship between AI value and input analog value.

AI value ranges from 0 to 4095 without any unit. AI value is displayed in hex on screen.

Figure 5-24 shows the AI value read on screen.

AI Value

4095

AI Value

4095

AI Value

4095

AI Value

4095

0

0

20 mA

0

4 20 mA

0

0 5 V

0

1

Fig 5-23: relationship between AI value and input analog value

5 V

138

Fig 5-24 AI value read on screen

5.2 Ethernet Module (AXM-NET)

5.2.1 Introduction to Ethernet

Ethernet was originally developed by Xerox and then developed further by

Xerox, DEC, and Intel. Ethernet uses a Carrier Sense Multiple Access with

Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) protocol, and provides transmission speeds up to 10 Mbps.

Now Ethernet stands for LAN with CSMA/CD protocol.

Ethernet is the most current communication standard in LAN. This standard defines the used type of cable and the method of Signal processing in LAN.

5.2.2 Function Description of Ethernet module

Please read appendix of technical data and specifications of Ethernet module before using.

* The Ethernet module supports Modbus-TCP protocol. It is used as a server, the default value of the protocol port is 502, and the user defined range of the protocol port is 2000~5999. The device address is the same as the meter.

* The Ethernet module supports SMTP protocol. It has an email function and supports “Send mail for timing” mode and “Send mail for event” mode.

* The Ethernet module supports HTTP protocol. It is used as an HTTP server, the default value of the protocol port is 80, and the scope of the protocol port is

6000~9999.

* The Ethernet module supports SNMP protocol. It is used as a SNMP agent, providing management to MIB library, so you can get data from the meter.

* The Ethernet module supports SNTP protocol. It can get update time to

Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).

139

140

5.2.3 Appearance and Dimensions

(Side View)

90mm

22mm

55.6mm

(Top View)

5.2.4 Installation Method

(Bottom View)

The Ethernet module is linked to the Acuvim II meter by a communication plug.

It can also be linked to other extended modules like IO modules.

1.Insert the installation clips to the counterpart of the meter, and then press the

Ethernet module lightly, so linking is established.

2.Tighten the installation screws.

141

Note:

1. Install Ethernet Module carefully to avoid damage;

2. Under no circumstances should any installation be done with the meter powered on. Failure to do so may result in injury or death.

5.2.5 Definition of RJ45 Interface

The Ethernet module uses a standard RJ45 connector to access the Ethernet network. The mechanical and electrical characteristics of the connectors comply with the requirements of IEC 603-7.

142

Script

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

ID

TX+

TX-

RX+ n/c n/c

RX- n/c n/c

(Top View)

Content

Tranceive Data+

Tranceive Data-

Receive Data+

Not connected

Not connected

Receive Data-

Not connected

Not connected

LED_L (yellow): displays speed status. LED on indicates 100Mbps, while LED off indicates 10Mbps.

LED_R (green): displays link and activity status combined. LED on indicates link status, while flashing LED indicates activity status.

5.2.6 Cable

Shielded twisted-pair cable (standard 568A or standard 568B) is usually recommended as reference to the EIA/TIA standard.

5.2.7 Connection Method

1. Direct Connect

The Ethernet module uses cross line (standard 568A) to connect to computers.

The module supports Modbus-TCP, HTTP and SNMP functions for a direct connection.

2. Indirect Connect

The Ethernet module uses straight line (standard 568B) to access the Ethernet through a router or hub.

5.2.8 Initializing Ethernet Module

AXM-NET Module's default settings are as follows:

IP Address (192.168.1.254);

Subnet Mask (255.255.255.0);

Gateway (192.168.1.1);

This information can be found by using the keys on the meter front. The following process shows how to configure Ethernet module settings by using the front panel:

143

144

1. Pressing “H” key and “V/A” key simultaneously on the meter will go to the menu selecting mode. Cursor “Meter” flashes in this mode.

Fig 5-25

2. Press “P” key or “E” key to move the cursor to "Setting". Press “V/A” key to go to the meter parameter setting mode. Device address page is the first page of

“Setting” mode. It shows the Modbus address of the device for several seconds, and then the screen goes to Access Code page. Press “V/A” key to go to the parameter setting page. Press “P” key or “E” key to move the cursor to "NET".

Press "V/A" key to go to the Ethernet module setting page.

Fig 5-26

145

146

Fig 5-27

Fig 5-28

3. Set configuration mode in the first setting page. “AUTO” means that users configure module settings with DHCP protocol while “MANU” means that users configure module settings with manual setting. Press “V/A” key, to go to the setting state and the area pointed out in Figure 5-29 will flash. Press “P” key or

“E” key to select configuration mode, press “V/A” key to accept. Press the "P" key again to go to the second setting page for IP Address.

Note: If you select the “AUTO” mode, please go to step 11 directly and reset module. Wait until the reset is finished and find the new IP address in the following step.

Fig 5-29

4. Set IP Address in the second setting page, such as 192.168.1.254 as shown below. Press the "V/A" key to go to the IP setting page. Users may set the parameters in the area pointed out in Figure 5-30. The cursor starts at the first digit. After setting the IP address press the "V/A" key to accept. Press the "P" key again to go to the third setting page for Subnet Mask.

147

148

Fig 5-30

5. Set Subnet Mask in the third setting page, such as 255.255.255.0. Press “V/A” key to go to the setting page. Users may set the parameters in the area pointed out in Figure 5-31. The cursor starts at the first digit. After setting the Subnet

Mask, press the "V/A" key to accept. Press the "P" key again to go to the fourth setting page for Gateway.

Fig 5-31

6. Set Gateway in the fourth setting page, such as 192.168.1.1. Press the "V/

A" key to go to the setting page. Users may set the parameters pointed out in

Figure 5-32. The cursor starts at the first digit. After setting the Gateway, press the "V/A" key to accept. Press the "P" key to go to the fifth setting page for DNS

Primary Server.

Fig 5-32

149

150

7. Set DNS Primary Server in the fifth setting page, such as 202.106.0.20. Press the "V/A" key to go to the setting page. Users may set the parameters pointed out in Figure 5-33. The cursor starts at the first digit. After setting the DNS

Primary Server, press the "V/A" key to accept. Press the "P" key to go to the sixth setting page for DNS Secondary Server.

Note: the DNS paramters must be set correctly to use the SMTP functions.

Fig 5-33

8. Set DNS Secondary Server in the sixth setting page, such as 202.106.196.115.

Press the "V/A" key to go to the setting page. Users may set the parameters pointed out in Figure 5-34. The cursor starts at the first digit. After setting the

DNS Secondary Server, press the "V/A" key to accept. Press the "P" key to go to the seventh setting page for the Modbus-TCP port.

Note: the DNS paramters must be set correctly in order to use the SMTP functions.

Fig 5-34

151

152

9. Set Modbus-TCP port in the seventh setting page, such as 502. Press the "V/

A" key to go to the setting page. Users may set the parameters pointed out in

Figure 5-35. The cursor starts at the first digit. After setting the Modbus-TCP port, press the "V/A" key to accept. Press the "P" key to go to the eighth setting page for the HTTP port. The Modbus-TCP port’s default value is 502, and the user defined range of port is 2000~5999. If the set port is not in the correct range, the set port will return to the default value.

Fig 5-35

10. Set HTTP port in the eighth setting page, such as 80. Press the "V/A" key to go to the setting page. Users may set the parameters pointed out in Figure

5-36. The cursor starts at the first digit. After setting the HTTP port, press the "V/

A" key to accept. Press the "P" key to go to the ninth setting page for the reset mode. The HTTP port's default value is 80, and the user defined range of port is

6000~9999. If the set port is not in the correct range, the set port will return to the default value.

Fig 5-36

11. Set resetting mode in the ninth setting page. Select “RESET” to reset the module. Selecting “NO” will not reset the module. Selecting "DEFAULT" will load the module with default settings and reset module. Press the "V/A" key to go to the setting page and the parameter pointed out in Figure 5-37 will flash.

Press the "P" or "E" key to select the configuration mode. Press the "V/A" key to accept.

Note: When configuring Ethernet module settings completely, users must select

“RESET” to restart module and new settings will take effect.

153

Fig 5-37

12. The password of AXM-NET module can be reset by selecting " RESET". The password then becomes "12345678". Selecting "NO" means no change. Press

"V/A" key to accept.

154

Fig 5-38

13. After configuring AXM-Net settings completely, press “H” key and “V/ A” key simultaneously to return to menu selecting mode.

5.2.9 Searching IP Address of Ethernet Module

The utility software of Acuvim II series meter supports a meter search function.

Users can use this function to obtain IP addresses, MAC addresses and all parameters of Ethernet Modules.

Operation steps:

1) Click “Start” menu of utility software.

2) Click “Search Device” menu.

Fig 5-39

155

3) Utility software pop-ups “Search Device(s)” window, and the window displays

IP address, MAC address and all parameters of module.

156

Fig 5-40

Note:This function is used only in LAN, not used in WAN or direct connect to computer.

5.2.10 Description of Modbus-TCP protocol

The Modbus-TCP protocol is used for communication in Ethernet modules. The protocol sets up master/slave link in Ethernet. First, master device (client) sets up

TCP link with slave device (server). Second, master device sends request frame to slave device, and slave device receives request frame and returns response frame to master device. Figure 5-41 displays working mode of Modbus-TCP protocol.

Request Indication

Modbus Client Modbus Server

Confirmation

Fig 5-41

Response

1. Protocol a. Data Frame Format

MBAP Header

7x8-Bits

Table 5-1

Function

8-Bits

Data

Nx8-Bits

b. Modbus Application Header (MBAP Header) Field

The Modbus application header field is the start of the data frame and consists of seven bytes.

Table 5-2

Field

Transaction

Identifier

Protocol Identifier

Length

Unit Identifier

Length

2 Bytes

2 Bytes

2 Bytes

1 Byte

Description

Identification of a Modbus Request/Response transaction

Modbus protocol=0

Number of following bytes

Slave address, in the range of 0~247 decimal.

c. Function Field

The function code field of a message frame contains eight bits. Valid codes are in the range of 1~255 decimal. When a message is sent from a client to a server device the function code field tells the server what kind of action to perform.

157

158

Code Meaning

01 Read Relay Output Status

02 Read Digital Input(DI) Status

03 Read Data

05 Control Single Relay Output

16 Write Multiple-registers

Table 5-3

Action

Obtain current status of Relay Output

Obtain current status of Digital Input

Obtain current binary value in one or more registers

Force Relay to a state of on or off

Place specific value into a series of consecutive multiple-registers

d. Data Field

The data field is constructed using sets of two hexadecimal digits, in the range of 00 to FF hexadecimal. The data field of messages sent from a master to slave devices contains additional information which the slave must use to take the action defined by the function code. This can include items like discrete and register addresses, the quantity of items to be handled, and the count of actual data bytes in the field. For example, if the master requests a slave to read a group of holding registers (function code 03), and the data field specifies the starting register and how many registers are to be read. If the master writes to a group of registers in the slave (function code 10 hexadecimal), the data field specifies the starting register, how many registers to write, the count of data bytes to follow in the data field, and the data to be written into the registers.

2. Format of communication

Explanation of frame

Transaction identifier hi

00H

Fun

03H

Table 5-4

Transaction identifier lo

00H

Data start reg hi

40H

Protocol identifier hi

00H

00H

Protocol identifier lo

00H

Data start reg lo

Length hi Length lo

00H

Data #of regs hi

00H

06H

Unit identifier

01H

Data #of regs lo

48H

As shown in Table 5-4 the meaning of each abbreviated word is:

Transaction identifier hi: Transaction Identifier high byte

Transaction identifier lo: Transaction Identifier low byte

Protocol identifier hi: Protocol Identifier high byte

Protocol identifier lo: Protocol Identifier low byte

Length hi: length high byte

Length lo: length low byte

Unit identifier: slave address

Fun: function code

Data start reg hi: start register address high byte

Data start reg lo: start register address low byte

Data #of regs hi: number of register high byte

Data #of regs lo: number of register low byte

a. Read Status Relay (Function Code 01)

Function Code 01

This function code is used to read relay status in Acuvim II series meter.

1=On 0=Off

There are 8 Relays in the meter, and the starting address is 0000H.

The following query is to read 2 Relays Status of the meter Address 1.

159

Query

Transaction identifier hi

00H

Table 5-5 Read 2 Relays Status Query Message

Transaction identifier lo

00H

Protocol identifier hi

00H

Protocol identifier lo

00H

Length hi

00H

Length lo

06H

Unit identifier

01H

Fun

01H

Data start reg hi

00H

Data start reg lo

00H

Data #of regs hi

00H

Data #of regs lo

02H

Response

The Acuvim II series meter response includes MBAP Header, function code, quantity of data byte and the data. For example response to read the status of

Relay 1 and Relay 2 is shown as Table 5-6. The status of Relay 1 and Relay 2 is responding to the last 2 bit of the data.

Table 5-6 Read 2 Relays Status Response Message

Relay 1: bit0

Transaction identifier hi

00H

Fun

01H

Transaction identifier lo

00H

Byte count

01H

The content of the data is,

Relay 2: bit1

Protocol identifier hi

00H

Data

02H

Protocol identifier lo

00H

7

0

6

0

5

0

4

0

3

0

2

0

MSB LSB

(Relay 1 = OFF , Relay 2=ON)

1

1

0

0

Length hi Length lo

00H 04H

Unit identifier

01H

160

b. Read Status of DI (Function Code 02)

Function Code 02

1=On 0=Off

There are 38 DIs in the meter, and the starting address is 0000H.

The following query is to read the 4 DIs Status of address 1 of Acuvim II series meter.

Query

Transaction identifier hi

00H

Fun

02H

Transaction identifier lo

00H

Table 5-7 Read 4 DIs Query Message

Protocol identifier hi

00H

Protocol identifier lo

00H

Length hi

00H

Data start reg hi

00H

Data start reg lo

00H

Data #of regs hi

00H

Data #of regs lo

04H

Length lo

06H

Unit identifier

01H

Response

The response includes MBAP Header, function code, quantity of data characters and the data characters.

An example response to read the status of 4 DIs (DI1=On, DI2=On, DI3=On, DI4=

On) is shown as Table 5-8. The status of each is responding to the last 4 bit of the data.

161

DI1: bit0

Transaction identifier hi

00H

Fun

02H

Transaction identifier lo

00H

Table 5-8 Read 4 DIs Response Message

DI2: bit1 DI3: bit2

Protocol identifier hi

00H

Protocol identifier lo

00H

Length hi Length lo

00H 04H

Byte count

01H

Data

0FH

DI4: bit3

Unit identifier

01H

The content of the data is,

7

0

6

0

5

0

4

0

3

1

2

1

MSB LSB

1

1

0

1

c. Read Data (Function Code 03)

Query

This function allows the users to obtain the measurement results of Acuvim II series meter.

Table 5-9 is an example of reading the 6 measured data (Time) from server device address 1, the data start address is 1040H.

Transaction identifier hi

00H

Fun

03H

Transaction identifier lo

00H

Data start reg hi

10H

Table 5-9 Read Time Query Message

Protocol identifier hi

00H

Protocol identifier lo

00H

Length hi

00H

Data start reg lo

40H

Data #of regs hi

00H

Data #of regs lo

06H

Length lo

06H

Unit identifier

01H

162

Response

An example response to read Time (2006-12-18 14:15:20) is shown as Table 5-10.

Table 5-10 Read Time Response Message

Transaction identifier hi

00H

Transaction identifier lo

00H

Protocol identifier hi

00H

Protocol identifier lo

00H

Length hi Length lo

00H 0FH

Unit identifier

01H

Data1 hi

Data1 lo

Data2 hi

Data2 lo

Data3 hi

Data3 lo

Data4 hi

Data4 lo

Data5 hi

Data5 lo

Data6 hi

Data6 lo

03H 0CH 07H D6H 00H 0CH 00H 12H 00H 0EH 00H 0FH 00H 14H

d. Control Relay (Function Code 05)

Query

The message forces a single Relay either on or off. Any Relay that exists within the Acuvim II series meter can be forced to be either status (on or off ). The address of Relay starts at 0000H, and the meter has eight Relays.

The data value FF00H will set the Relay on and the value 0000H will turn it off; all other values are invalid and will not affect that relay.

The example below is a request to Acuvim II series meter address 1 to turn on

Relay 1.

Transaction identifier hi

00H

Fun

05H

Table 5-11 Control Relay Query Message

Transaction identifier lo

00H

Protocol identifier hi

00H

Protocol identifier lo

00H

Length hi Length lo

00H 06H

Data start reg hi

00H

Data start reg lo

00H

Value hi

FFH

Unit identifier

01H

Value lo

00H

163

164

Response

The normal response to the command request is to retransmit the message as received after the Relay status has been altered.

Table 5-12 Control Relay Response Message

Transaction identifier hi

00H

Transaction identifier lo

00H

Protocol identifier hi

00H

Protocol identifier lo

00H

Length hi Length lo

00H 06H

Unit identifier

01H

Fun

05H

Data start reg hi

00H

Data start reg lo

00H

Value hi

FFH

Value lo

00H

e. Preset/Reset Multi-Register (Function Code 16)

Query

Function code 16 allows the user to modify the contents of a Multi-Register. The example below is a request to an Acuvim II series meter address 1 to Preset CT1

(500) and CT2 (5). CT1 data address is 1008H, and CT2 data address is 1009H.

Transaction identifier hi

00H

Table 5-13 Preset CT Value Query Message

Transaction identifier lo

00H

Protocol identifier hi

00H

Protocol identifier lo Length hi Length lo

00H 00H 0BH

Unit identifier

01H

10H 10H

Response

Data start reg lo

08H

Data #of regs hi

00H

Data #of regs lo

02H

Byte count

04H

Value1 hi

01H

Value1 lo

F4H

Value2 hi

00H

Value2 lo

05H

The normal response to a preset Multi-Register request includes MBAP Header, function code, data start register and the number of registers.

Transaction identifier hi

00H

Table 5-14 Preset Multi-Registers Response Message

Transaction identifier lo

00H

Protocol identifier hi

00H

Protocol identifier lo

00H

Length hi Length lo

00H 06H

Unit identifier

01H

Fun

10H

Data start reg hi

10H

Data start reg lo

08H

Data #of regs hi

00H

Data #of regs lo

02H

Users may refer to the sixth chapter “Communication” and get the details of

Acuvim II series meter.

When using Modbus/TCP function, it is best to set the Scan interval of the software to under 1000 ms.

When using Third Party software, it is best to set Frame interval for the Modbus-

TCP function to under 1000 ms.

165

5.2.11 Webpage Browsing and Parameter Settings

The Ethernet module supports HTTP protocol and has a Web Server function making the Acuvim II series meter accessible through Ethernet at anytime from anywhere.

The Ethernet module supports IE Browser 6.0 and higher editions and the

Webpage Settings only support ASCII characters.

The IP address will be referred to as "192.168.1.200" for the remainder of this chapter.

1. Main page

Users enter the correct IP address and HTTP port of the module in the address bar of the web browser. This provides access to "Data", "Settings" and "Module

Status"

.

166

Fig 5-42

2. Module Status Webpage

By selecting the "Module Status" link, users can view the status and change the settings of the Ethernet module.

Fig 5-43

167

168

3. Settings Webpage

By selecting the "Settings" link, users can access "Network Settings", "Mail

Settings", "Webpage Settings", "Management" and "Password Setting".

When accessing the "Settings" link, users will be prompted to enter a password.

The default password is 12345678.

a. “Password” Webpage

Figure 5-44: “Password” webpage. If the password is valid, the browser will go to the “Network Settings” webpage. If an incorrect password is used, users will be notified of "Invalid Password".

Fig 5-44

b. “Network Settings” Webpage

Figure 5-45: “Network Settings” webpage. There are three sections for you to set: Ethernet setting, SNTP setting and SNMP trap setting. In Ethernet setting section, it supports two network setting modes: Manual or Auto. There are two port settings: HTTP port and Modbus-TCP port.

The default value of Modbus-TCP port is 502, and the user defined range is

2000~5999. The default value of HTTP port is 80, and the user defined range is

6000~9999.

In SNTP setting section, there are four contents:

SNTP Enable, enable SNTP function.

SNTP Interval, setup interval seconds which SNTP client check SNTP server.

The default value is 10min, and the user defined range is 1-60000min.

SNTP Server, setup SNTP Server which SNTP client update from. Please find available SNTP server from internet.

Time Zone Selecting: select Time Zone which matches your location.

In SNMP trap setting section, there are two contents:

SNMP Trap Enable, enable SNMP trap function.

SNMP Trap Server, setup SNMP Trap Server which SNMP agent send trap to.

169

170

Fig 5-45

c. “Mail Settings” Webpage

Figure 5-46: “Mail Settings” webpage. Users can choose between 4 mail sending modes: "Triggerd Sending", "Timed Sending", both "Triggered and Timed

Sending" and "None". Boxes marked with "*" cannot be left blank. "Triggered

Sending" means users will receive mail when the meter detects a new event, such as an "Alarm Event" or "SOE Event". "Timed Sending" means users can receive mail every 5~1440 minutes (user settable) reporting "Metering",

"Energy", "Harmonics", "Sequence", "Max/Min", "Alarm Record" and "SOE Record".

Sending Modes can be set as follows:

Setting"Triggered Sending" mode: users can select one or all of the checkboxes below. Triggered Sending includes "Alarm Event" and "SOE Event" as seen in

Figure 5-46. Triggered Sending mode is disabled if neither "Alarm Event" or "SOE

Event" is selected.

Setting"Timed Sending" mode: users enter a number between 5 and 1440 minutes into the box beside "Timed Sending". This number is the interval time between mail. Sending mode is disabled if 0 is entered. Users can also select which parameters to receive reports on by checking the checkboxes below

"Timed Sending" in Figure 5-46.Setting both "Triggered Sending" and "Timed

Sending" mode: users follow the steps for both "Triggered Sending" and "Timed

Sending" above.

"None" mode: users disable both "Triggered Sending" and "Timed Sending" modes.

Note: Mail Server part includes "SMTP Server", "User Name" and "Password".

For the "SMTP Server" users can input either domain name such as "mail.

accuenergy.com" or an IP address such as "222.128.6.73" which is from "mail.

accuenergy.com" resolved. A user name and password will be required to log in.

171

172

Fig 5-46

d. "Web Configuration Settings" Webpage

Figure 5-47: "Webpage Settings" page. Users set the "Device Description" according to the meter type.

Fig 5-47

e. “Management" webpage

Figure 5-48: "Management" webpage. Users can easily update the software online by selecting the updated file, which can be got from Accuenergy

Corporation. The "Reboot NET module" option resets the module itself.

IP Address:192.168.1.254

Subnet Mask:255.255.255.0

Gateway:192.168.1.1

173

174

DNS Primary: 202.106.0.20

DNS Secondary: 202.106.196.115

MODBUS Port: 502

HTTP Port: 80

Fig 5-48

f. “Password Setting” Webpage

Figure 5-49: “Password Setting” webpage.To change the password, users need to input the current password first.

Fig 5-49

175

4. Data Webpage

Click "Data" Link to Visit Data webpages.There are eight kinds of data webpages.

They are "Metering" webpage, "Energy" webpage, "Harmonics" webpage,

"Sequence" webpage, "Max and Min" webpage, "Alarm Record" webpage, "SOE

Record" webpage and “IO Status” webpage. Each webpage shows the working status of the meter.

176

Fig 5-50

"Metering" webpage includes the data of real-time parameters for Acuvim II series meter. There are thirty nine parameters, such as Volts AN, I A, Watt A.

"Energy" webpage includes the energy data for Acuvim II series meter. There are twenty-four parameters, such as Delivered kWh, kVAh.

"Harmonics"webpage includes harmonics parameters for Acuvim II series meter, such as THD Volts Average.

"Sequence" webpage includes the sequence and angle parameters for Acuvim

II series meter. There are fifteen parameters, such as positive sequence of VA,the angle VB to VA.

"Max and Min" webpage includes the max and min data of parameters for

Acuvim II series meter. There are twenty-five parameters, such as Volts AN, I A , and Watt Total (Demand).

"Alarm Record" webpage includes alarm records for Acuvim II series meter. There are sixteen records. record. Each record includes Time Stamp, Limit ID,Status,

Alarm Channel and Value.

"SOE Record" webpage includes SOE record for Acuvim II series meter. There are twenty records. Each record includes Time Stamp, DI Status.

"IO Status" webpage includes DI status or DI counters, DO status, RO status,

Analog Input values and Analog Output values.

5.2.12 Email Function

The Ethernet module supports SMTP protocol, which provides email capabilities.

Before sending emails, users must set their own DNS Server. Please refer to

"Network settings"which includes DNS Server setting.

Please note, as per 3.c of Section 5.2.11, there are three modes users can select.

The first is "Trigged Sending", which means once new events happen, users can receive email notifications immediately. The second is "Timed Sending" mode.

Users can receive emails based on preset time invervals (5~1440 minutes), which include all information on "Data" webpage.

The third mode is a combination of "Triggered Sending" and "Timed Sending".

177

178

5.2.13 SNMP Function

Ethernet communication supports SNMP (Simple Network Management

Protocol) protocol, so you can get data from the meter through SNMP, by get, get-next, and walk instructions. To master this manual, you suppose to be familiar with SNMP protocol, and you have generously mastered the function and application of this product.

We will show you an example of how to use SNMP server software to get data from the meter. The example is showed by MG-SOFT MIB Browser Professional

SNMPv1/v2c Edition 2010.

NOTE: MG-SOFT MIB Browser Professional is the production of MG-SOFT

Corporation, and its copyrights are reserved by MG-SOFT Corporation. We will not supply MG-SOFT MIB Browser Professional with our meters.

1. Compile MIB

After installed MG-SOFT MIB Browser Professional, you can load AcuvimII.mib file by MIB Compiler, which is one part of MG-SOFT MIB Browser Professional.

Fig 5-51

Using F7 on keyboard to compile this MIB, then select ACCUENERGY-MIB, select

Save.

179

180

Fig 5-52

After successfully adding AcuvimII MIB, there should show ACCUENERGY-MIB in

MIB Modules, which OID is 1.3.6.1.4.1.39604.

Fig 5-53

2. Load ACCUENERGY-MIB

Opening MIB Browser, which is part of MG-SOFT, select MIB Table, then load

ACCUENERGY-MIB from MIB Modules, unload unnecessary MIBs from Loaded

MIB modules.

181

182

Fig 5-54

3. Contact SNMP Agent

Change to Query Label, input IP address under Remote SNMP agent, such as

192.168.1.249, select Contact button , if the SNMP agent works on this IP, it will return like this,

Remote address: 192.168.1.249 port: 161 transport: IP/UDP

Local address: 192.168.1.126 port: 3592 transport: IP/UDP

Protocol version: SNMPv1

1: [Loaded: RFC-1215] sysUpTime.0 (timeticks) 0 days 20h:11m:50s.23th

(7271023)

Fig 5-55

4. Walk the MIB

Right Click on the tree root, then expand MIB, find AcuvimII OID, right click to select walk , then query whole acuvimII MIB.

183

184

QUERY returns like these,

***** SNMP QUERY STARTED *****

1: phaseVoltageA.0 (integer) 0

2: phaseVoltageB.0 (integer) 0

3: phaseVoltageC.0 (integer) 0

Fig 5-56

4: averagePhaseVoltage.0 (integer) 0

5: lineVoltageAB.0 (integer) 0

…………

371: lastMonthEqImpSum.0 (integer) 0

372: lastMonthEqExpSum.0 (integer) 0

373: lastMonthEsSum.0 (integer) 0

***** SNMP QUERY FINISHED *****

5. Get a value

Right Click on one MIB OID, which you want to query, then select Get , and then return the OID value.

For example, the followings demonstrate the result of getting the value of phaseVoltageA.

Operation: Get

Request binding:

1: phaseVoltageA.0 (null) null

Response binding:

1: phaseVoltageA.0 (integer) 0

185

186

Fig 5-57

5.2.14 SNTP Function

Ethernet communication supports SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) protocol, so meters can get update time to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).

Please find the SNTP Settings – Network Settings by Internet Explorer.

Fig 5-58

187

5.3 ProfiBus Module (AXM-PRO)

5.3.1 Introduction of PROFIBUS Technology

PROFIBUS (Process Field bus) is an international field bus standard which is widely used in automation technology of manufactures and flow industry. It is a widely used, open digital communication system, which is suitable for highspeed, time-critical, and high reliability communications.

PROFIBUS is one kind of open style field bus standard which is promoted by

SIEMENS Corporation. In 1989, it became the German standard DIN19245, in

1996, it became the European standard EN50170, in 1999 it was accepted as part of the international standard IEC61158 and in 2001 it became the Chinese national standard JB/T 10308.3-2001 for field bus of machinery industry controlling systems.

There are 3 types of PROFIBUS: PROFIBUS-DP (Decentralized Periphery),

PROFIBUS-PA Process Automation) and PROFIBUS-FMS (Field bus Message

Specification). ALL types follow the same protocol.

With optimized, high-speed, low-cost communication links, PROFIBUS-DP is especially used in automatic controlling systems and equipment level decentralized I / O communication. It can meet real-time response, stability and reliability of equipment level and distributed controlling systems.

The PROFIBUS module uses PROFIBUS-DP (V0) protocol.

5.3.2 PROFIBUS module application notes

Please read appendix of technical data and specifications of PROFIBUS module before using it. In addition, please read the communication addresses of

MODBUS protocol, which are the communication addresses for the PROFIBUS

188

module as well.

* The PROFIBUS module can only be used as slave in PROFIBUS network. Its slave address ranges from 0 to 126, which can only be set by the panel. If the address is changed, it will take effect immediately.

* The PROFIBUS module’s baud rate can be adaptive between 9.6Kbps to

12Mbps in PROFIBUS network.

* The PROFIBUS module terminals should be connected properly to avoid problems during installation.

* Please read GSD file of the PROFIBUS module carefully before using. The GSD file contains technial information such as device name, ID number and so on.

* Please read the communication data format thoroughly as this is a key point of the PROFIBUS module.

189

190

5.3.3 Appearance and Dimensions

90mm

55.6mm

(Top View)

(Bottom View)

5.3.4 Installation Method

(Side View)

Fig 5-59

22 mm

Fig 5-60

PROFIBUS is linked to Acuvim II meter by communication plug. It can also be linked to other extended modules such as IO modules.

1. Insert the installation clips to the counterpart of Acuvim II meter, and then press the PROFIBUS module lightly, so linking is established.

2. Tighten the installation screws.

Note: 1. Install IO Modules carefully to avoid damage;

2. Under no circumstances should any installation be done with the meter powered on. Failure to do so may result in injury or death.

191

192

*

5.3.5 Definition of DP Interface

7

8

5

6

9

Pins

1

2

3

4

The PROFIBUS module uses standard 9-pin D-type connector to access

PROFIBUS network. The mechanical and electrical characteristics of connector are consistent with the requirements of IEC 807-3. The connector of PROFIBUS is a socket, and the counterpart connector of cable is a plug. Connector pins are distributed as follows:

Table 5-15

RS-485

——

——

B

——

SHIELD

ID

N24V

RXD/TXD-P

CNTR-P

C DGND

—— Vp

—— P24V

A RXD/TXD-N

—— CNTR-N

Content

Power GND

-24V Output

Data P (Receive /Send)

Controlling P

Digital Ground

Positive Voltage

+24V output

Data N (Receive /Send)

Controlling N

Used by PROFIBUS

NO

NO

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

YES

NO

*Note: Pin 4 is used for RTS controlling and TTL, which is optional.

5.3.6 Cable

Shielded twisted pair cable is recommended as reference to the EIA RS-485 standard. If the interference is within the EIA RS-485 standard then nonshielded twisted pair cable can may be used.

5.3.7 Bus Terminal

Based on DP standard, the first station and the last station in PROFIBUS-DP network should connect bus terminal (resistor), and it is not necessary for other stations, as shown in the figure below.

STATION 3

P N

STATION 4

P N

Vp

390

390

Vp

P

STATION 1

N

220

220

P

STATION 2

N

390

390

DGND

DGND

Fig 5-61

Connection of many DP stations

The bus terminal is composed of three resistors and connection wire, where Vp is the supply positive voltage and DGND is the Digital Ground. When the bus is idle, the bus terminal makes the data P level higher than data N, so the bus’s idle signal is always 1.

193

5.3.8 Address Setting

The PROFIBUS module can only be used as a slave in the PROFIBUS network.

Its slave address ranges from 0 to 126, which can only be set by the front panel of the meter (in SYS sub menu of Acuvim II Setting menu). If the address is changed, it will take effect immediately.

Figure bellow shows the address setting of PROFIBUS module.

194

Fig 5-62 Address setting of PROFIBUS module

5.3.9 Baud Rate

The PROFIBUS module’s baud rate can be adaptive between 9.6Kbps to 12Mbps in PROFIBUS network.

5.3.10 GSD Files

A PROFIBUS-DP master can exchange data with various slave devices. In order to indentify a slave device, it is necessary to obtain the technical data of the device itself. The file where the data is described is called Device Description Data File

(GSD).

Because of the importance of GSD file, please read it carefully before using the

PROFIBUS module. The GSD file is provided in pure text format with detailed comments.

As a DP slave device, the PROFIBUS module supports protocol of V0 revision.

The PROFIBUS module’s data interface is a 16 word input/output interface.

5.3.11 Information Exchange

A variety of information from the Acuvim II meter can be transmitted by the

PROFIBUS module, such as electrical quantities and other parameters. The basic communication method of the Acuvim II meter is RS-485, which uses protocol of MODBUS-RTU. In order to use the same address lists as MODBUS-RTU, the communication formats of PROFIBUS-DP is categorized in the same way as

MODBUS-RTU.

It is recommaneded to refer to the communicaion part of the Acuvim II manual (Chapter 6) for the list of MODBUS-RTU addresses, function codes, the relationships between values, etc. Some examples are:

1. There are various function codes, such as 01H, 02H,03H, 05H,10H, for the various categorized parameters. Different function codes have different formats of query and response frames.

2. There is a specific relationship between numerical value in register of Acuvim

195

196

II meter and the real physical value.

3. Different parameters may have different data length and data type.

These three points are also suitable for the PROFIBUS-DP protocol in PROFIBUS module.

Note: the following “communication formats”are suitable for the application data, but not for the PROFIBUS-DP’s frame characteristic data.

Function codes, such as 01H, 02H and 03H, are inquiry commands. For users to quickly switch the inquiry contents, we define 8 channels named 1 to 8 , in order to update data more quickly.

5.3.12 Format of function code 01H

Function code 01H is used to read relay status in MODBUS-RTU. In PROFIBUS-DP, the format of function code 01H is defined as follows:

Query:

Table 5-16

Frame Bytes

Byte1

Byte2

Byte3

Byte4

Byte5

Byte6

Byte7~32

Caption

Channels can be chosen from 1 to 8

01H starting address high byte starting address low byte quantity of coils high byte quantity of coils low byte

0

Because 16 words are required for IO data in GSD file, all other bytes after Byte7 are set to 0.

Response

Below is the response that a slave device would send to a master.

Table 5-17

Frame Bytes

Byte1

Byte2

Byte3

Byte4

Byte5~32

Caption

The channel of inquiry frame

01H byte count coil status

0

The coils in the response message are packed as one coil per bit of the data field.

Status is indicated as 1=ON and 0=OFF. The LSB of the first data byte contains the output addressed in the query. The other coils follow toward the high order end of this byte, and form low order to high order in subsequent bytes.

Example: reading Relay1 and Relay2 status (start register address is 0000H). Use

4 channels.

Table 5-18

Query

Byte1

04H

Byte2

01H

Byte3

00H

Byte4

00H

Byte5

00H

Byte6

02H

Byte7~32

00H

Response

Byte1

04H

Coil Status

Byte2

01H

Byte3

01H

Byte4

02H

Byte5

00H

Byte6

00H

7

0

6

0

5

0

4

0

3

0

2

0

1

1

MSB LSB

( Relay 1 = OFF, Relay 2=ON )

Byte7~32

00H

0

0

197

198

5.3.13 Format of function code 05H

The message with function code (05H) in MODBUS-RTU forces a single relay either on or off. The data value FFOOH will set the relay on and the value 0000H will turn it off. All other values are invalid and will not affect that relay.

In PROFIBUS-DP, the format of function code 05H is defined as follows:

Query

Table 5-19

Frame Bytes

Byte1

Byte2

Byte3

Byte4

Byte5

Byte6

Byte7~32

FAH

05H outputs address high byte

Caption outputs address low byte outputs value high byte outputs value low byte

0

Note: Because PROFIBUS-DP V0 exchanges information data periodically, controlling information such as function code 05H should be used carefully.

Response

The normal response to the command request is to retransmit the message as received after the relay status has been altered.

Table 5-20

Frame Bytes

Byte1

Byte2

Byte3

Byte4

Byte5

Byte6

Byte7~32

Caption

FAH

05H outputs address high byte outputs address low byte outputs value high byte outputs value low byte

0

Example: setting Relay2 on.

Table 5-21

Query

Byte1

FAH

Response

Byte2

05H

Byte3

00H

Byte4

01H

Byte1

FAH

Byte2

05H

Byte3

00H

Byte4

01H

Byte5

FFH

Byte5

FFH

Byte6 Byte7~32

00H 00H

Byte6 Byte7~32

00H 00H

5.3.14 Format of function code 02H

Function code 02H is used to read DI status in MODBUS-RTU. In PROFIBUS-DP, the format of function code 02H is defined as follows:

Table 5-22

Query

Frame Bytes

Byte1

Byte2

Byte3

Byte4

Byte5

Byte6

Byte7~32

Caption

Channels can be chosen from 1 to 8

02H starting address high byte starting address low byte quantity of digital inputs high byte quantity of digital inputs low byte

0

Table 5-23

Response

Frame Bytes

Byte1

Byte2

Byte3

Byte4

Caption

The channel of inquiry frame

02H byte count inputs status1

199

Byte5

Byte6

Byte7

Byte8~32 inputs status2 (or 0) inputs status3 (or 0) inputs status4 (or 0)

0

The digital inputs in the response message are packed as one input per bit of the data field. Status is indicated as 1=ON; 0=OFF. The LSB of the first data byte contains the input addressed in the query. The other inputs follow toward the high order end of this byte, and from low order to high order in subsequent bytes.

Example: reading 4 DI statuses (starting address is 0000H). Use 6 channels.

Table 5-24

Query

Byte1

06H

Response

Byte1

06H

Byte2

02H

Byte2

02H

Byte3

00H

Byte3

01H

Byte4

00H

Byte4

06H

Byte5

00H

Byte5~32

00H

Byte6

04H

Byte7~32

00H

DI status

7

0

6

0

5

0

4

0

3

0

2

1

1

1

MSB LSB

( DI1 = OFF, DI2=ON, DI3 = ON , DI4 = OFF )

0

0

200

5.3.15 Format of function code 03H

This function code is used in MODBUS-RTU to read the contents of a continuous block of holding registers in Acuvim II meter. In PROFIBUS-DP, the format of function code 03H is defined as follows:

Table 5-25

Query

Frame Bytes

Byte1

Byte2

Byte3

Byte4

Byte5

Byte6

Byte7~32

Caption

Channels can be chosen from 1 to 8

03H starting address high byte starting address low byte quantity of registers high byte quantity of registers low byte

0

“Quantity of registers” indentifies how many words will be read.

Table 5-26

Response

Frame Bytes

Byte1

Byte2

Byte3

Byte4

Byte5

Byte6

Byte32

Caption

The channel of inquiry frame

03H byte count

Register value1 high byte

Register value1 low byte

......

......

“Byte count” indentifies how many bytes will be read.

The register data in the response message is packed as two bytes per register,

201

202 with the binary contents correctly justified with each byte. For each register, the first byte contains the high order bits and the second contains the low order bits.

It is important to note: The response has a 16-word frame. so the maximum

“quantity of registers” should less than 15. Otherwise, it will return an error result.

Example: reading 3 measured data (F,V1,V2) from Acuvim II meter. The data address of F includes 4000H and 4001H. The data address of V1 includes 4002H and 4003H. The data address of V2 includes 4004H and 4005H. (Use 7 channels)

Table 5-27

Query

Byte1

07H

Response

Byte2

03H

Byte3

40H

Byte4

00H

Byte5

00H

Byte6

06H

Byte7~32

00H

Byte1

07H

Byte9

C7H

Byte2

03H

Byte3

0CH

Byte4

42H

Byte5

48H

Byte6

00H

Byte10 Byte11 Byte12 Byte13 Byte14

CCH CDH 42H C8H 33H

Byte7

00H

Byte8

42H

Byte15 Byten16~32

33H 00H

(F=42480000H(50.00Hz), V1=42C7CCCDH(99.9v),

V2=42C83333H(100.1v)).

Note: the relationship between the numerical value in the register of the meter and the actual physical value is described in detail in Chapter 6.

5.3.16 Format of function code 10H

This function code is used in MODBUS-RTU to write a block of continuous registers in the Acuvim II meter, such as system parameters setting and so on. In

PROFIBUS-DP, the format of function code 10H is defined as follows:

Table 5-28

Query

Frame Bytes

Byte1

Byte2

Byte3

Byte4

Byte5

Byte6

Byte7

Byte8

Byte9

Byte10

Byte11

......

Byte32

Caption

FAH

10H starting address high byte starting address low byte quantity of registers high byte quantity of registers low byte byte count register value 1 high byte register value 1 low byte register value 2 high byte register value 2 low byte

......

0

“Quantity of registers” indicates how many words will be written.

“Byte count” indicates how many bytes will be written. If “quantity of register” is N, then “byte count” is (N×2).

It is important to note: the response has a 16-word frame, so the maximum

"quantiy of registers" should be less than 13. Otherwise it will return an error result.

Response

The normal response returns the function code, starting address, and quantity of registers written.

203

204

Frame Bytes

Byte1

Byte2

Byte3

Byte4

Byte5

Byte6

Byte7~32

Table 5-29

Caption

FAH

10H starting address high byte starting address low byte quantity of registers high byte quantity of registers low byte

0

Example: presetting import active enengy (EP_imp) to 17807783.3Kwh. Based on the relationship between the register value and the physical value, we can get that the register value in hex is 0A9D4089H. The data address of EP_imp includes 4048H and 4049H.

Table 5-30

Query

Byte1 Byte2 Byte3 Byte4 Byte5 Byte6 Byte7 Byte8

FAH 10H 40H 48H 00H 02H 04H 0AH

Byte9

9DH

Byte10

40H

Byte11

89H

yte12~32

00H

Response

Byte1

FAH

Byte2

10H

Byte3

40H

Byte4

48H

Byte5

00H

Byte6 Byte7~32

02H 00H

Example Projects

To facilitate your understanding of the PROFIBUS module, we have developed a PLC-based DEMO engineering application program. Please read DEMO procedure documentation for the specific information. This DEMO is available upon request, please call Technical Support.

5.4 RS485 Module (AXM-485)

5.4.1 Communication Parameters Setting

RS485, also known as EIA-485, is a telecommunications standard for binary serial communications between devices. RS485 is the most versatile communication standard in the standard series defined by the EIA, and it is currently a widely used communication interface in data acquisition and control applications where multiple nodes communicate with each other.

The RS485 signals are floating and each signal is transmitted over a differential signal + line and a differential signal - line. The RS485 receiver compares the voltage difference between both lines, instead of the absolute voltage level on a signal line. If the differential signal + and differential signal - lines are twisted, better communication performance can be achieved. The twisted pair adds immunity to fight noise. If high noise immunity is needed, often a combination of twisting and shielding is used. For example, shielded twisted pair or foiled twisted pair networking cables.

5.4.2 Function Description of RS485 module

AXM-RS485 module uses RS485 serial communication and the Modbus-RTU protocol, just like the onboard RS485 port of the Acuvim II series meter. It provides a second RS485 port for serial communication, and it can be working with the onboard RS485 serial communication simultaneously.

The terminals of communication are A, B, and S. A is differential signal +, B is differential signal -, and S is connected to the shield of the twisted pair cables.

• Up to 32 devices can be connected on a RS485 bus without repeaters.

205

206

• Use good quality shielded twisted pair cable, AWG22 (0.5mm

2

) or higher.

• The overall length of the RS485 cable connecting all devices should not exceed 1200m (4000ft).

• Every A(+) should be connected to A(+), B(-) to B(-), or it will influence the network, or even damage the communication interface.

• When using a long communication cable to connect several devices, an antisignal reflecting resistor (typical value 120Ω-300Ω/0.25W) is normally added to the end of the cable beside the last meter if the communication quality is distorted.

5.4.3 Appearance and Dimensions

22mm

(side view)

90.00mm

(top view)

5.4.4 Installation Method

(bottom View)

Fig 5-63

Fig 5-64

The RS485 module is linked to the meter by a communication plug. It also can be linked to other extended modules.

1.Insert the installation clips to the counterpart of the meter, and then press the

RS485 module lightly, so linking is established.

2.Tighten the installation screws.

207

Note:

1. Install AXM-RS485 Module carefully to avoid damage;

2. Under no circumstances should any installation be done with the meter powered on. Failure to do so may result in injury or death.

5.4.5 Connection Method

The RS485 module is using 2-wire, half-duplex communication mode, which is the same as the one the onboard RS485 port is using. If the master does not have RS485 communication port, a converter (such as a RS232/RS485 or a USB/

RS485 converter) will be required. Typical RS485 network topologies include line, circle and star. The shield of each segment of the RS485 cable must be connected to the ground at one end only.

208

Fig 5-65

The default baud rate of RS485 module is 38400 bps. Users can change the baud rate in system settings S03 of the Acuvim II series meter.

The data format is start bit + 8n data bit + parity + stop bit. NON1, NON2, odd and even can be selected for parity mode on S32 of Setting page of Acuvim

IIR and Acuvim IIE meter (Not support Acuvim II meter). NON1 represents non-parity, single stop bit; NON2 represents non-parity, double stop bit; odd represents odd-parity, single stop-bit; even represents even parity, single stop bit; As is shown, the RS485 module’s parity is set as None 2.

Fig 5-66

Please note: if AXM-NET is used, RS-485 module’s parity (PAR2) must be set as

None1 in order to have the meter recognize the AXM-NET.

5.4.6 Communication Address

Please refer to Chapter 6 for Modbus register addresses.

209

5.5 BACnet Module(AXM-BACnet)

5.5.1 BACnet Overview

The Building Automation and Control Network (BACnet), described in the

ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-1995, is one of the most widely used building management systems protocols.

BACnet was designed to allow communication of building automation and control systems for applications such as heating, ventilating, and airconditioning control, lighting control, access control, and fire detection systems and their associated equipment. The BACnet protocol provides mechanisms for computerized building automation devices to exchange information, regardless of the particular building service they perform.

5.5.2 Introduction

The Acuvim II Series Power Meter has embedded BACnet IP communication, and also has embedded BACnet MS/TP communication. It communicates in native

BACnet IP over Ethernet to seamlessly integrate with most building automation/ control systems, and communicating with the BACnet MS/TP via the RS485. The

Acuvim II Series Power Meter's BACnet IP and BACnet MS/TP has 56 predefined

BACnet objects that let you track up to 56 measurements.

The Acuvim II Series Power Meter has native BACnet/IP that lets it act as a

BACnet server in any BACnet application. The Acuvim II Series Power Meter’s

BACnet IP also comes with a Web interface that is very easy to browse the parameter data by using a standard browser.

5.5.3 About BACnet Protocol

BACnet operates in a client-server environment. A client machine sends a

210

service request (message) to a server machine; once the service is performed the results are reported back to the client machine. BACnet defines 5 groups

(or classes) of 35 message types. For example, one class contains messages for retrieving and manipulating the object properties described above. An example of a common service request in this class is "ReadProperty." When the server machine receives this message from a client machine, it locates the requested property of the requested object and sends the value to the client.

The BACnet protocol consists of Objects that contain different kinds of information. Each Object has properties that contain data related to it. Below is the example of an Object for Total Watts:

Object_Name, P_rms

Object_Type, AnalogValue

Object_Instance, 17

Present_Value, watt, tot (value in watts)

For more detailed information, visit the BACnet website at www.bacnet.org.

5.5.4 Using the Acuvim II Series Power Meter’s BACnet

Serial and Ethernet versions

There are a couple of different serial and Ethernet based-versions of BACnet.

The most common serial version is called BACnet MS/TP while the dominant

Ethernet version is BACnet/IP.

BACnet/IP has been developed to allow the BACnet protocol to use TCP/IP networks. You could say that BACnet/IP is a way of hooking BACnet up to the

Internet and communicate with different Local Area Networks (LANs). This enables system owners, facility managers, or even external suppliers to access

BACnet networks and manage their devices and systems remotely.

211

212

Table 5-31

BACnet MS/TP facts

Network Type

Topology

Installation :

Speed max. Stations:

Data

Serial RS-485 with a Master/Slave Token Passing protocol

Line topology

Any cable with at least 3 conductors can be used. Distance between nodes depends on baud rate.

9600 kbit/s,19200 kbit/s, 38400 kbit/s and 76800 kbit/s

127 MS/TP masters

Up to 480 bytes per telegram frame

Table 5-32

BACnet/IP facts

Network Type:

Topology:

Installation :

Speed max. Stations:

Data :

Ethernet based network using UDP for data transfer.

Line or star topology (Standard Ethernet topology)

Ethernet twisted pair cables with RJ45 connectors

10/100 Mbit/s full duplex

No network limitation of number of nodes.

Up to 1476 bytes per frame

5.5.5 Using The BACnet Module (AXM-BACnet)

1. Installation Method

Fig 5-67

The BACnet module is linked to the Acuvim II meter by a communication plug. It can also be linked to other extended modules like IO modules.

1) Insert the installation clips to the counterpart of the meter, and then press the BACnet module lightly, so linking is established.

2) Tighten the installation screws.

Note:

1) Install BACnet Module carefully to avoid damage;

2) Under no circumstances should any installation be done with the meter powered on. Failure to do so may result in injury or death.

2. Definition of RJ45 Interface and 485 Interface

The BACnet/IP module uses a standard RJ45 connector to access the network.

The mechanical and electrical characteristics of the connectors comply with the requirements of IEC 603-7.

Fig 5-68

213

6

7

4

5

8

Script

1

2

3

Table 5-33 n/c n/c

RXn/c n/c

ID

TX+

TX-

RX+

Content

Tranceive Data+

Tranceive Data-

Receive Data+

Not connected

Not connected

Receive Data-

Not connected

Not connected

The BACnet MS/TP module uses a standard 485 connector to access the network.

214

2

3

#

1

Item

Network Status LED

Module Status LED

BACnet connector

BACnet Connector

Pin number

1

2

3

4

5

Name

Common

Data-

Shield

Data+

Table 5-34

Description

Signal common

Negative RS485 RxD/TxD

Cable shield

Positive RS485 RxD/TxD not used

3. Initializing Ethernet Module

1) BACnet Module Enable Set

When the module is first used buy user, the information can be found by using

the keys on the meter front. The following process shows how to configure

BACnet module settings by using the front panel:

The initial structure module parameter steps: a) Pressing “H” key and “V/A” key simultaneously on the meter will go to the menu selecting mode. Cursor “Meter” flashes in this mode.

Fig 5-69 b) Press “P” key or “E” key to move the cursor to "Setting". Press “V/A” key to go to the meter parameter setting mode. Device address page is the first page of

“Setting” mode. It shows the Modbus address of the device for several seconds, and then the screen goes to Access Code page. Press “V/A” key to go to the parameter setting page. Press “P” key or “E” key to move the cursor to "SYS". Press

"V/A" key to go to the system setting page.

215

Fig 5-70

216

Fig 5-71 c) Press "V/A" key to go to the System setting page. The initial page is S01 the meter address page. Press “P” key or “E” key to move to S35 page .Then press "V/

A" key to go to the BACnet protocol enable setting page. Press “P” key or “E” key to select configuration mode, press “V/A” key to accept and complete.

Fig 5-72

2) BACnet/IP module set

BACnet/IP Module's default settings are as follows:

IP Address (0.0.0.0);Subnet Mask (0.0.0.0);Gateway (0.0.0.0); DNS1 (0.0.0.0); DNS2

(0.0.0.0);

This information can be found by using the keys on the meter front. The following process shows how to configure BACnet module settings by using the front panel: a). Pressing “H” key and “V/A” key simultaneously on the meter will go to the menu selecting mode. Cursor “Meter” flashes in this mode.

217

218

Fig 5-73 b). Press “P” key or “E” key to move the cursor to "Setting". Press “V/A” key to go to the meter parameter setting mode. Device address page is the first page of

“Setting” mode. It shows the Modbus address of the device for several seconds, and then the screen goes to Access Code page. Press “V/A” key to go to the parameter setting page. Press “P” key or “E” key to move the cursor to "NET".

Press "V/A" key to go to the BACnet module setting page.

Fig 5-74

Fig 5-75

Fig 5-76 c). Set configuration mode in the first setting page. “AUTO” means that users configure module settings with DHCP protocol while “MANU” means that users configure module settings with manual setting. Press “V/A” key, to go to the setting state and the area pointed out in Figure 5-77 will flash. Press “P” key or

219

“E” key to select configuration mode, press “V/A” key to accept. Press the "P" key again to go to the second setting page for IP Address.

Note: If you select the “AUTO” mode, please go to step 10 directly and reset module. Wait until the reset is finished and find the new IP address in the following step.

220

Fig 5-77 d). Set IP Address in the second setting page, such as 192.168.1.100 as shown below. Press the "V/A" key to go to the IP setting page. Users may set the parameters in the area pointed out in Figure 5-78. The cursor starts at the first digit. After setting the IP address press the "V/A" key to accept. Press the "P" key again to go to the third setting page for Subnet Mask.

Fig 5-78 e). Set Subnet Mask in the third setting page, such as 255.255.255.0. Press “V/A” key to go to the setting page. Users may set the parameters in the area pointed out in Figure 5-79. The cursor starts at the first digit. After setting the Subnet

Mask, press the "V/A" key to accept. Press the "P" key again to go to the fourth setting page for Gateway.

Fig 5-79

221

f). Set Gateway in the fourth setting page, such as 192.168.1.1. Press the "V/

A" key to go to the setting page. Users may set the parameters pointed out in

Figure 5-80. The cursor starts at the first digit. After setting the Gateway, press the "V/A" key to accept. Press the "P" key to go to the fifth setting page for DNS

Primary Server.

222

Fig 5-80 g). Set DNS Primary Server in the fifth setting page, such as 202.106.0.20. Press the "V/A" key to go to the setting page. Users may set the parameters pointed out in Figure 5-81. The cursor starts at the first digit. After setting the DNS

Primary Server, press the "V/A" key to accept. Press the "P" key to go to the sixth setting page for DNS Secondary Server.

Fig 5-81 h). Set DNS Secondary Server in the sixth setting page, such as 202.106.196.115.

Press the "V/A" key to go to the setting page. Users may set the parameters pointed out in Figure 5-82. The cursor starts at the first digit. After setting the

DNS Secondary Server, press the "V/A" key to accept. Press the "P" key to go to the seventh setting page for the BACnet/IP port.

Fig 5-82

223

i). Set BACnet/IP port in the seventh setting page, such as 47808. Press the "V/

A" key to go to the setting page. Users may set the parameters pointed out in Figure 5-83. The cursor starts at the first digit. The BACnet/IP port’s default value is 47808, and the user defined range of port is 1~65535. After setting the BACnet/IP port, press the "V/A" key to accept. Press the "P" key to go to the eighth setting page for the BACnet RESET.

224

Fig 5-83 j). Set resetting mode in the eighth setting page. Select “RESET” to reset the module. Selecting “NO” will not reset the module. Press the "V/A" key to go to the setting page and the parameter pointed out in Figure 5-84 will flash.Press the "P" or "E" key to select the configuration mode. Press the "V/A" key to accept.

Note: When configuring BACnet module settings completely, users must select

“RESET” to restart module and new settings will take effect.

Fig 5-84 k). After configuring AXM-BACnet settings completely, press “H” key and “V/ A” key simultaneously to return to menu selecting mode.

3). BACnet MS/TP module set

BACnet MS/TP Module's default settings are as follows:

MAC Addr(0); BACnet Bps(9600); Max Info Pram(1).

This information can be found by using the keys on the meter front. The following process shows how to configure BACnet module settings by using the front panel: a). Pressing “H” key and “V/A” key simultaneously on the meter will go to the menu selecting mode. Cursor “Meter” flashes in this mode.

225

226

Fig 5-85 b). Press “P” key or “E” key to move the cursor to "Setting". Press “V/A” key to go to the meter parameter setting mode. Device address page is the first page of

“Setting” mode. It shows the Modbus address of the device for several seconds, and then the screen goes to Access Code page. Press “V/A” key to go to the parameter setting page. Press “P” key or “E” key to move the cursor to "NET".

Press "V/A" key to go to the BACnet module setting page.

Fig 5-86

Fig 5-87

Fig 5-88 c). Set module address in the first setting page. Press the "V/A" key to go to the setting page. Users may set the parameters pointed out in Figure 5-89. The cursor starts at the first digit. The BACnet MS/TP Address’s default value is 0, and the user defined range of address is 0~127. After setting the BACnet MS/

TP Address, press the "V/A" key to accept. Press the "P" key to go to the second setting page for the baud rate.

227

228

Fig 5-89 d). Set Baud Rate in the second setting page, such as 38400.The module can support the baud rate such as 9600,19200,38400,76800. Press the "V/A" key to go to the setting page. Users may set the parameters pointed out in Figure 5-90.

After setting the BACnet MS/TP Baud rate, press the "V/A" key to accept. Press the "P" key to go to the third setting page for the MAX INFO FRAM.

Fig 5-90

e). Set MAX INFO FRAM in the third setting page, such as 1. The BACnet MS/

TP MAX INFO FRAM default value is 1, and the user defined range of MAX INFO

FRAM is 1~255. Users may set the parameters pointed out in Figure 5-91. After setting the BACnet MS/TP MAX INFO FRAM, press the "V/A" key to accept. Press the "P" key to go to the fourth setting page for the module reset.

Fig 5-91 f). Set resetting mode in the fourth setting page. Select “RESET” to reset the module. Selecting “NO” will not reset the module. Selecting "RESET" will load the module with modify settings. Press the "V/A" key to go to the setting page and the parameter pointed out in Figure 5-92 will flash. Press the "P" or "E" key to select the configuration mode. Press the "V/A" key to accept.

Note: When configuring BACnet module settings completely, users must select

“RESET” to restart module and new settings will take effect.

229

230

Fig 5-92 g). After configuring AXM-BACnet settings completely, press “H” key and “V/ A” key simultaneously to return to menu selecting mode.

5.5.6 Acuvim II Series Power Meter’s BACnet Objects

The Acuvim II Series Power Meter's BACnet IP has 56 predefined objects of electrical measurements. No programming or mapping is necessary to use the BACnet objects. The object’s names easily identify the measurements they contain. All of the objects, with the exception of Modbus Meter and POLL_

DELAY are AI (analog input) Object type. The following table lists each of the objects with their units of measurement and description.

ObjectType Instance

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

0

3

4

1

2

Freq_rms

Ua_rms

Ub_rms

Uc_rms

Uvag_rms

Name

Table 5-35

Object

DataType

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

Value

ADI1

ADI2

ADI3

ADI4

ADI5

Descriptor

Frequency

Voltage A

Voltage B

Voltage C

Phrase Voltage Avg

ObjectType Instance

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

30

31

32

33

26

27

28

29

22

23

24

25

18

19

20

21

34

35

36

37

38

14

15

16

17

10

11

12

13

5

8

9

6

7

Name

Qa_rms

Qb_rms

Qc_rms

Q_rms

Sa_rms

Sb_rms

Sc_rms

S_rms

PFa_rms

PFb_rms

PFc_rms

PF_rms

Unbl_u2

Unbl_i2

Rlc_val

P_dema

Uab_rms

Ubc_rms

Uca_rms

Ulag_rms

Ia_rms

Ib_rms

Ic_rms

Ivag_rms

In_rms

Pa_rms

Pb_rms

Pc_rms

P_rms

Q_dema

S_dema

Ia_Demand

Ib_Demamd

Ic_Demand

Object

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

DataType

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

FLOAT

Value

ADI27

ADI28

ADI29

ADI30

ADI31

ADI32

ADI33

ADI34

ADI19

ADI20

ADI21

ADI22

ADI23

ADI24

ADI25

ADI26

ADI6

ADI7

ADI8

ADI9

ADI10

ADI11

ADI12

ADI13

ADI14

ADI15

ADI16

ADI17

ADI18

ADI35

ADI36

ADI37

ADI38

ADI39

Descriptor

Voltage A-B

Voltage B-C

Voltage C-A

Line Voltage Avg

Current A

Current B

Current C

Current Average

Neutral Current

Pa

Pb

Pc

Total Active Power

Qa

Qb

Qc

Total Reactive Power

Sa

Sb

Sc

Total Apparent Power

PFa

PFb

PFc

Total Power Factor

Voltage Imbalance

Current Imbanacne

Load Characteristics

P Demand

Q Demand

S Demand

Ia Demand

Ib Demamd

Ic Demand

231

232

ObjectType Instance

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

AnalogValue

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

Name Object

Active_Energy_IMP

Active_Energy_EXP

DataType

UINT32

UINT32

Reactive_Energy_IMP

Reactice_Energy_EXP

UINT32

UINT32

Active_Energy_TOTAL UINT32

Active_Energy_NET SINT32

Reactive_Energy_TOTAL UINT32

Reactive_Energy_NET SINT32

Apprent_Energy

THD_V1

UINT32

UINT16

THD_V2

THD_V3

THD_V

THD_ I1

UINT16

UINT16

UINT16

UINT16

THD_ I2

THD_ I3

THD_I

UINT16

UINT16

UINT16

Value

ADI46

ADI47

ADI48

ADI49

ADI50

ADI51

ADI52

ADI53

ADI40

ADI41

ADI42

ADI43

ADI44

ADI45

ADI54

ADI55

ADI56

Descriptor

Active_Energy_ IMP

Active_Energy_EXP

Reactive_Energy_ IMP

Reactice_Energy_EXP

Active_Energy_TOTAL

Active_Energy_NET

Reactive_EnergyTOTAL

Reactive_Energy_NET

Apprent_Energy

THD_V1

THD_V2

THD_V3

THD_V

THD_ I1

THD_ I2

THD_ I3

THD_I

5.5.7 Browse the web server

1) Configure your Power Meter, make sure your module connected to your computer or access LAN.

2) Consult your module IP through the meter front panel.

3) Open your web browser and connect to the meter at the address you found on the Meter.

4) Then you will come to the main page.

Fig 5-93

5) Click the Network interface, you will see network information.

Fig 5-94

233

6) Click the Network configuration, you will see network configure page, it is something about the IP setting parameter.

234

Fig 5-95

7) Click the Network statistics, you will see network status page, it is something about the module network parameter status.

Fig 5-96

Fig 5-97

235

236

8) At the main page. Click the Paramater data, you will see all the parameter data, it is real time parameter data for communication.

Fig 5-98

Chapter 6 Communication

6.1 Modbus Protocol Introduction

6.2 Communication Format

6.3 Data Address Table and Application Details

6.3.1 System Parameter Setting

6.3.2 System Status Parameter

6.3.3 Date and Time Table

6.3.4 Over/Under Limit Alarming Setting

6.3.5 I/O Modules Settings

6.3.6 Metering Parameter Address Table

6.3.7 Data Logging

6.3.8 Time of use

6.4 DNP3.0 Protocal Introduction

237

This chapter will mainly discuss how to handle the meter via the communication port using software. It is highly recommanded that previous chapters be read before moving onto Chapter 5, a familiarity with Modbus would also be helpful.

6.1 Modbus Protocol Introduction

Modbus

TM

RTU protocol is used for communication in Acuvim II series meters.

Data format and error check methods are defined in Modbus protocol. The half duplex query and respond mode is adopted in Modbus protocol. There is only one master device in the communication network. The others are slave devices, waiting for the query of the master.

Transmission mode

The mode of transmission defines the data structure within a frame and the rules used to transmit data. The mode is defined in the following which is compatible with Modbus RTU Mode*.

Framing

Address

8-Bits

Table 6-1 Data Frame Format

Function

8-Bits

Data

N×8-Bits

Check

16-Bits

Coding System

Start bit

Data bits

Parity

Stop bit

Error checking

8-bit binary

1

8 no parity, odd parity, even parity

1 or 2

CRC check

Address Field

The address field of a message frame contains eight bits. Valid slave device

238

addresses are in the range of 0~247 decimal. A master addresses a slave by placing the slave address in the address field of the message. When the slave sends its response, it places its own address in this address field of the response to let the master know which slave is responding.

Function Field

The function code field of a message frame contains eight bits. Valid codes are in the range of 1~255 decimal. When a message is sent from a master to a slave device the function code field tells the slave what kind of action to perform.

Code

01

02

03

05

16

Read Data

Control Relay Output

Press Multiple-Register

Table 6-2 Function Code

Meaning

Read Relay Output Status

Read Digital Input(DI) Status

Action

Obtain current status of Relay Output

Obtain current status of Digital Input

Obtain current binary value from one or more registers

Force relay state to "ON" or "OFF"

Place specific binary values into a series of consecutive Multiple-Registers

Data Field

The data field is constructed using sets of two hexadecimal digits, in the range of 00 to FF hexadecimal. The data field of messages sent from a master to slave devices contains additional information which the slave must use to take the action defined by the function code. This can include items such as register addresses, the quantity of items to be handled, and the count of actual data bytes in the field. For example, if the master requests a slave to read a group of holding registers (function code 03), the data field specifies the starting register and how many registers are to be read. If the master writes to a group of registers in the slave (function code 10 hexadecimal), the data field specifies the starting register, how many registers to write, the count of data bytes to follow

239

240 in the data field, and the data to be written into the registers.

If no error occurs, the data field of a response from a slave to a master contains the data requested. If an error occurs, the field contains an exception code that the master application can use to determine the next action to be taken. The data field can be nonexistent (of zero length) in certain kinds of messages.

Error Check Field

Every message includes an error checking field which is based on the Cyclical

Redundancy Check (CRC) method. The CRC field checks the contents of the entire message. It is applied regardless of any parity check method used for the individual characters of the message. The CRC field is two bytes long, containing a 16-bit binary value. The CRC value is calculated by the transmitting device, and is appended to the message.

The receiving device recalculates the CRC value during reception of the message, and compares the calculated value to the actual value it received in the CRC field. If the two values are not equal, an error will be reported. CRC calculation is first started by preloading the whole 16-bit register to 1’s. The process begins by applying successive 8-bit bytes of the message to the current contents of the register. Only the eight bits of data in each character are used for generating the CRC. Start and stop bits, and the parity bit, do not apply to the CRC. When generating the CRC, each 8-bit character is exclusive ORed with the register contents. The result is shifted towards the least significant bit

(LSB), with a zero filled into the most significant bit (MSB) position. The LSB is extracted and examined, if the LSB equals to 1, the register is exclusive ORed with a preset, fixed value; if the LSB equals to 0, no action will be taken. This process is repeated until eight shifts have been performed. After the last (eighth) shift, the next 8-bit byte is exclusive ORed with the register's current value, and the process repeats for eight more shifts as described above. After all the

bytes of the message have been applied,the final contents of the register, which should exchange the high-byte and the low-byte, is the CRC value. When the

CRC is appended to the message, the low-order byte is appended first, followed by the high-order byte.

6.2 Communication Format

Explanation of frame

Table 6-3 Explanation of frame

Addr

06H

Fun

03H

Data start reg HI

00H

Data start reg LO

00H

The meaning of each abbreviated word is:

Data #of regs HI

00H

Addr: Address of slave device

Fun: Function code

Data start reg HI: Start register address high byte

Data start reg LO: Start register address low byte

Data #of reg HI: Number of register high byte

Data #of reg LO: Number of register low byte

CRC16 HI: CRC high byte

CRC16 LO: CRC low byte

Data #of regs LO

21H

CRC 16

HI

84H

CRC 16

LO

65H

1. Reading Relay Status

Function Code 01

This function code is used to read the status of the relay in the meter.

1=On 0=Off

Relay1’s address is 0000H, Relay2’s address is 0001H, and so on.

The following query is to read the relay status for the meter with communication address 17.

241

242

Query

Addr

11H

Response

Fun

01H

Table 6-4 Read the status of Relay1 and Relay2 Query Message

Relay start reg HI

00H

Relay start reg LO

00H

Relay #of regs HI

00H

Relay #of regs LO

02H

CRC 16

HI

BFH

CRC 16

LO

5BH

The Acuvim II series meter response includes the meter address, function code, quantity of data byte, the data, and error checking. An example response to read the status of Relay1 and Relay2 is shown as Table 5.5. The status of Relay1 and Relay2 are responding to the last 2 bits of the data.

Relay1: bit0 Relay2: bit1

Address

11H

Table 6-5 Relay status response

Function code

01H

Byte count

01H

Data

02H

CRC high

D4H

CRC low

89H

The content of the data is:

7

0

6

0

5

0

4

0

3

0

2

0

1

1

0

0

Relay1 = OFF ( LSB ), Relay2=ON (Left to LSB )

2. Read Status of DI

Function Code 02

1=On 0=Off

DI1’s address is 0000H, DI2’s address is 0001H, and so on.

The following query is to read the Status of 4 DIs of Acuvim II series meter with communication address 17.

Query

Table 6-6 Read 4 DIs Query Message

Addr Fun DI start addr HI DI start addr LO DI num HI DI num LO CRC 16 HI CRC 16 LO

11H 02H 00H 00H 00H 04H 7BH 59H

Response

The Acuvim II series meter response includes the meter address, function code, quantity of data characters, the actual data characters and error checking. An example response to read the status of 4 DIs are shown in Table in 5.7. The DI status corresponds to the last 4 bits of the data.

DI1: bit0; DI2: bit1; DI3: bit2; DI4: bit3.

Address

11H

Function code

02H

Table 6-7 Read Status of DI

Byte count

01H

Data

03H

The content of the data is:

7

0

MSB

6

0

5

0

DI1=On, DI2=On, DI3=Off, DI4=Off.

4

0

3

0

2

0

CRC high

E5H

1

1

LSB

CRC low

49H

0

1

3. Read Data (Function Code 03)

Query

This function allows the master to obtain the measurement results from the

Acuvim II series meter. Table 6.8 is an example of reading the measured data (F,

V1 and V2) from slave device number 17, the data address of F is 4000H, 4001H;

V1's address is 4002H, 4003, and V2's address is 4004H, 4005H.

243

244

Addr Fun

11H

Response

03H

Table 6-8 Read F, V1, V2 Query Message

Data start addr HI

40H

Data start addr LO

00H

Data #of regs HI

00H

Data #of regs LO

06H

CRC 16 regs HI

D2H

CRC 16 regs LO

98H

The Acuvim II series meter response includes the meter address, function code, quantity of data bytes, data, and error checking. An example response to read

F, V1 and V2 (F=42480000H (50.00Hz), V1=42C7CCCDH (99.9V), V2=42C83333H

(100.1V)) is shown:

Table 6-9 Read F, V1 and V2 Message

Addr Fun

Byte count

Data1

HI

Data1

LO

Data 2

HI

11H 3H 0CH 42H 48H 00H

Data2

LO

Data3

HI

Data3

LO

Data4

HI

Data4

LO

00H 42H C7H CCH CDH

Data5

HI

42H

Data5

LO

C8H

Data 6

HI

33H

Data6

LO

33H

4. Control Relay (Function Code 05)

Query

CRC16

HI

CAH

CRC16

LO

7FH

This message forces a relay to either turn "ON" or "OFF". Any relay that exists within the Acuvim II series meter can be forced to either "ON" or "OFF" status.

The data value FF00H will set the relay on and the value 0000H will turn it off; all other values are invalid and will not affect that relay.

The example below is a request to the Acuvim II series meter with the address of

17 to turn on Relay1.

Addr

11H

Fun

05H

Table 6-10 Control Relay Query Message

DO addr

HI

00H

DO addr

LO

00H

Value

HI

FFH

Value

LO

00H

CRC 16

HI

8EH

CRC 16

LO

AAH

Response

The normal response to the command request is to retransmit the message as received after the relay status has been altered.

Addr

11H

Fun

05H

Table 6-11 Control Relay Response Message

Relay addr

HI

00H

Relay addr

LO

00H

Value

HI

FFH

Value

LO

00H

5. Preset / Reset Multi-Register (Function Code 16)

Query

CRC

HI

8EH

CRC

LO

AAH

Function 16 allows the user to modify the contents of a multi-register. Some registers of Acuvim II series meter can have their contents changed by this message. The example below is a request to an Acuvim II series meter with the address of 17 to preset Ep_imp as "17807783.3KWh", while its HEX value is

0A9D4089H. Ep_imp data address is 4048H and 4049H.

Addr Fun

11H 10H

Value HI

0AH

Response

Table 6-12 Preset Multi-Register Query Message

Data start reg HI

40H

Data start reg LO

48H

Data #of reg HI

00H

Data #of reg LO

02H

Value LO

9DH

Value HI

40H

Value LO

89H

CRC HI

F1H

Byte Count

04H

CRC LO

6AH

The normal response to a preset multi-register request includes the Acuvim II series meter address, function code, data start register, the number of registers, and error checking.

Addr

11H

Fun

10H

Table 6-13 Preset Multi-Register Response Message

Data start reg hi

40H

Data start

reg lo

48H

Data #of

reg hi

00H

Data #of

Reg lo

02H

CRC16

hi

D6H

CRC16

lo

8EH

245

6.3 Data Address Table and Application Details

There are several rules to follow in using the meter:

1. Data type:

“bit” refers to binary.

“word” refers to 16-bit unsigned integer using one data address and 2 bytes of memory, it varies from 0 to 65535.

“int” refers to 16-bit integer using one data address and 2 bytes of memory, it varies from -32768 to32767.

“dword” refers to 32-bit unsigned integer using two data addresses and 4 bytes of memory with high word at the front and low word at the end, it varies from 0 to 4294967295. Rx=high word *65536+low word.

“float” refers to 32-bit single value using two data addresses and 4 bytes of memory, it varies from -1.175494E-38 to 3.402823E+38.

2. Relationship between communication value and numerical value.

It is important to note, the numerical value may not be the same as the communication value. The following table shows how they respond to each other.

Note: In current channel, CT are optional,which include voltage type CT or current type CT.

1) When current type CT is selected and the value of CT2 is 1 or 5, and using relationship listed below to count primary value, the value of CT2 should be original 1 or 5.

2) When voltage type CT is selected and the value of CT2 is 333, and using

246

relationship listed below to count primary value, the value of CT2 should not be

333, but 1.

Run time

Clock

Parameters

System parameters

Relationship

Numerical value equals to communication value

T=Rx/100

Numerical value equals to communication value

Energy(primary)

Reactive energy(primary)

Apparent energy(primary)

Energy(secondary)

Ep=Rx/10

Eq=Rx/10

Es=Rx/10

Ep=Rx/1000

Reactive energy (secondary) Eq=Rx/1000

Apparent energy (secondary) Es=Rx/1000

Frequency

Voltage

F=Rx/100

U=Rx X(PT1/PT2)/10

Current, current demand

Power, demand

Reactive power, demand

Apparent power, demand

Power factor

Unbalance factor

THD

Harmonics

Total odd HD

Total even HD

Crest factor

K factor

THFF

Phase angle

I=Rx X(CT1/CT2)/1000

P=Rx X(PT1/PT2)X(CT1/CT2)

Q=Rx X(PT1/PT2)X(CT1/CT2)

S=Rx X(PT1/PT2)X(CT1/CT2)

PF=Rx/1000

Unbl=(Rx/1000)X100%

THD=(Rx/10000) X 100%

HDn=(Rx/10000) X 100%

HDo=(Rx/10000) X 100%

HDe=(Rx/10000) X 100%

CF=Rx/1000

KF=Rx/10

THFF=(Rx/10000) X 100%

Phase angle=Rx/10

Unit

No unit

Hour

Unit of time

A

W var

VA

No unit

No unit

No unit

No unit kWh kvarh kVA kWh kvarh kVA

Hz

V

No unit

No unit

No unit

No unit

No unit

Degree

Format code

F1

F2

F3

F16

F17

F18

F19

F12

F13

F14

F15

F8

F9

F10

F11

F4

F5

F6

F7

F20

F21

F22

F23

F24

F25

Important Note: Regions from “System parameters settings” to “Data logging

3 settings” are the regions that can be set and modified. Please follow these guidelines when communicating with the meter.

247

248

1. When function code 10H is used, one communication command can only modify contents in one region, such as “System parameters settings”, ”System status parameter”, “Date and Time table”, “Over/under limit alarming-Global settings”, “Over/under limit alarming-Single settings”, “I/O Modules settings”,

Data logging 1 settings,Data logging 2 settings,Data logging 3 settings. It can not be accomplished in one communication order to modify contents in both of two or more regions above.

2. When function code 03H is used, the rules and limitations described above will not be applied.

6.3.1 System Parameter Setting

System parameters determine how the meter works. Please refer to Chapter 3 and Chapter 4 for more details.

Function code: 03H for reading, 10H for writing. Data type: word. Format code:

F1.

Address Parameter

0ffdH Frequency

0ffeH

First communication

Protocol

0fffH Parity Setting1

1000H Password

1001H Communication address

1002H Baud rate

1003H Voltage input wiring type

1004H Current input wiring type

Default Range

0

0

3

0 : 50Hz 1 : 60Hz

0:MODBUS Protocol

1:DNP3.0 Protocol

0: EVEN 1: odd 2:NON2

3:NON1

0~9999 0

1

1~247(MODBUS)

0~65534(DNP3.0)

19200 1200~38400

0

0

0 :3LN; 1:1LN; 2:2LL; 3:3LL;

4:1LL

0:3CT,1:1CT,2:2CT

Data type

Word

Word word word word word word word

Property

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

1005H PT1 (High 16 bit)

1006H PT1 (Low 16 bit)

1007H PT2

1008H CT1

1009H CT2

100aH kWh pulse constant

100bH kvarh pulse constant

100cH LCD backlight time

100dH Demand slid window time

100eH Demand calculating mode

100fH Clear demand memory

1010H Max/Min clear

1011H Run time clear

1012H Current I1 direction

1013H Current I2 direction

1014H Current I3 direction

1015H VAR/PF convention

1016H Energy clear

1017H Energy calculating mode

1018H

Reactive power measuring mode

1019H Energy display mode

101aH Ethernet module reset

1

0

55H

0

0

0

220.0

5

1

50.0~500000.0

220.0

50.0~400.0

5 1~50000

1,5,333

1~60000(Setting method, see Remarks)

1

1

1~60000(Setting method, see Remarks)

0~120 word word word word word word word word

15 word

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

1~30

1:sliding window

2:thermal

Only 1 works

Only 0AH works

Only 1 works

0: Positive

1: Negative

0: Positive

1: Negative

0: Positive

1: Negative

0: IEC, 1: IEEE

Only 1 works

0: fundamental

1: full-wave

0: real, 1: general

0: primary, 1: secondary

0: none, 1: reset,

2: load default and reset word word word word word word word word word word word word word

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

249

250

101bH SOE enable

101cH Pulse counter clear

101dH Basic parameter mode

0

0

0

0: none; 1: AXM-IO11;

2: AXM-IO21; 3: AXM-IO31;

4: AXM-IO12; 5: AXM-IO22;

6: AXM-IO32;

0:none; 1:AXM-IO11;

2:AXM-IO21; 3:AXM-IO31;

4:AXM-IO12; 5:AXM-IO22;

6:AXM-IO32;

0:secondary; 1:primary word word word

R/W

R/W

R/W

Note:1) when 0FFEH is 0, first communication protocol is set to MODBUS, while

0FFEH is 1, first communication protocol is DNP3.0. At this time, special DNP3.0 software is needed, and normal software will be invalid.

2)100AH, 100BH setting method:1000 * 3600 / (U * I * n * pulse constant) = pulse period (S), pulse period calculated by the pulse constant must be greater than the pulse width (20ms ~ 1000ms) of IO module DO setting, Wherein n is applied with the user, and if the three-phase signals are added, then n is 3. U and I generally equal to user settings PT2, CT2, ie, rated voltage and tated current .

6.3.2 System Status Parameters

“System status” indicates what events happened in the meter, what kinds of flags are read by user and the index of the storage of events. Flags should be cleared after being read by the controller, otherwise new data will not be stored properly.

Function code: 03H for reading, 10H for writing. Data type: word.

Address

101EH

Parameter

Sealed

Nonstandard

Parameters

Seal status

Reserved

Alarm record clear

Format code

Range

Bit0: 1st communication parameters

Bit1: 2nd communication parameters

Bit2: run time clear

Bit3: DI pulse count

Bit4: TOU

1: valid of corresponding selection

0: invalid

0x0A: Seal sealed; Other:

Seal opened.

101FH

1020H

1021H

1022H~102DH Reserved

102eH

102fH

1030H

1031H

1032H

1033H

System status

Baud rate2

Parity Setting2

Communication address2

Alarming group number

SOE group number

Bit0:new alarming or not

Bit1: new SOE or not

38400 4800~38400

0: EVEN 1: odd 2:NON2

3:NON1

F1

F1

1~247

0: no alarming record

1~16: last alarming record group number

0: no SOE record

1 ~ 2 0 : l a s t S O E g ro u p number

1034H

1035H

Run time (high)

Run time (low)

F2

0x0A: clear

Other: not clear

0~999999999

Data type

Word

Word

Word word word word word word word word word

Property

R/W

R/W

R/W

R

R/W

R/W

R

R

R

R

R

251

252

1036H

Expanded

IO Modules connecting status

Bit0: AXM-IO11;

Bit1: AXM-IO12;

Bit2: AXM-IO21;

Bit3: AXM-IO22;

Bit4: AXM-IO31;

Bit5: AXM-IO32;

0: disconnected

1: connected word R

1037H

1038H

1039H

103aH

103bH

103cH

103dH

103eH

Reserved

2nd communication selection

Ten years download setting enable

Fee of sharp demand clear

Fee of peak demand clear

Fee of valley demand clear

Fee of normal demand clear

Total fee of demand clear

1: BACnet Protocol

0: Other Protocol

1: enable is valid

0x0A: clear

Other: not clear

0x0A: clear

Other: not clear

0x0A: clear

Other: not clear

0x0A: clear

Other: not clear

0x0A: clear

Other: not clear

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

Note:

1) Please refer to Chapter 3 and Chapter 4 for more details about parameter settings.

2) When 1038H is 1, second communication protocol is set to BACnet protocol, while second communication should select BACnet module. When 1038H is 0, second communication protocol is set to other protocols, while second communication should select second RS-485 module, PROFIBUS module or Ethernet module. If selected protocol doesn’t match attached module, communication can not process.

6.3.3 Date and Time Table

Function code: 03H for reading, 10H for presetting.

Address

103fH

1040H

1041H

1042H

1043H

1044H

1045H

Parameter week

Year

Month

Day

Hour minute second

Format code

F3

F3

F3

F3

F3

F3

F3

Range

0~6

2000-2099

1~12

1~31

0~23

0~59

0~59

Data type word word word word word word word

Property

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

6.3.4 Over/Under Limit Alarming Setting

This setting consists of global alarm settings and single channel alarm settings.

Global alarm settings contain settings of all global variables. There are 16 groups of records with the same format. Function code: 03H for reading, 10H for writing. Please refer to Chapter 4 for more details.

Global alarming settings

Address

1048H

1049H

Parameter

1046H Global alarming enable

1047H Alarming flash enable

Alarming channel enable setting

Range

0:disable;1:enable

0:disable;1:enable

0~65535

Bit0:channel 1

1:enable; 0:disable

Bit1: channel 2

……

Bit15: channel 16

Logic “And ” between alarming setting

0~255

Bit0: first logic switch

1:enable;0:disable

Bit1: second logic switch

……

Bit7: eighth logic switch

Data type Property word R/W word R/W word word

R/W

R/W

253

254

104aH Alarming output to DO1 setting

104bH Alarming output to DO2 setting

104cH Alarming output to DO3 setting

104dH Alarming output to DO4 setting

0~65535

Bit0: channel 1 output

1:enable;0:disable

Bit1: channel 2 output

……

Bit15: channel 16 output

0~65535

The same as previous

0~65535

The same as previous

0~65535

The same as previous word word word word

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

Single channel alarming settings

Address

104eH

104fH

Parameter

First group: parameter code

First group: comparison mode

Format code

F1

F1

1050H

1051H

1052H

1053H~

109dH

First group: setpoint value

First group: delay

First group: output to relay

2 nd

to 16 th

group

Alarming parameter code table

Setting value

0

3

Alarming object

Frequency

Vc

Setting value

1

4

6 Ubc 7

F10~F18

F1

F1

Alarming object

Va

Average phase voltage

Uca

Range

0~79

1: greater than; 2: equal to; 3: less than

Related with parameters

0~3000(*10ms)

0:none,

1~8: related relay

Same as the first group

Data type word word word word word word

Property

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

Setting value

2

5

8

Alarming object

Vb

Uab

Average line voltage

9

21

24

27

30

48

51

12

15

18

42

45

33

36

39

Line current of phase A

Average line current

Power of phase B

Reactive power of phase A

Reactive power of all

Apparent power of phase C

PF of B

Voltage unbalance factor

U_unbl

THD_V1(V1 or

V12)

Average THD_V

THD_ I3

AI2 sampling value

Active power demand of all

Current demand of phase A

reversed phase sequence

10

13

16

19

22

25

28

31

Line current of phase B

Neutral current

Power of phase C

Reactive power of phase B

Apparent power of phase A

Apparent power of all

PF of C

Current unbalance factor I_unbl

34

37

40

43

46

49

THD_V2(V2 or

V31)

THD_I1

Average

THD_I

AI3 sampling value

Reactive power demand of all

Current demand of phase B

52~79 DI1~DI28

11

23

26

29

32

44

47

35

38

41

14

17

20

50

Line current of phase

C

Power of phase A

Power of all

Reactive power of phase C

Apparent power of phase B

PF of A

PF

Load characteristic(R/

L/C)

THD_V3(V3 or V23)

THD_ I2

AI1 sampling value

AI4 sampling value

Apparent power demand of all

Current demand of phase C

Note:

1. When reversed phase sequence (51) is selected, whether the value of comparison mode or setpoint value is set or not doesn’t affect alarm result and angle of Ub to Ua will be recorded.

2. When DI (52~79) is selected, whether the value of comparison mode is set or

255

256 not doesn’t affect alarm result and as long as setpoint value is set to 1, 2 or 3.

1 stands for DI alarm is from OFF to ON, and recovery is from ON to OFF.

2 stands for DI alarm is from ON to OFF, and recovery is from OFF to ON.

3 stands for DI alarm from ON to OFF, and recovery is from OFF to ON, and present DI status is recorded.

6.3.5 I/O Modules Settings

I/O module setting changes will be made only if the corresponding I/O modules are installed, no changes will be made otherwise. Please check the I/O module connection status before doing any settings. Function code: 03H for reading,

10H for writing. Please refer to Chapter 5 Extended Modules for more details.

AXM-IO11

Data type Property Address Parameter

109eH DI1~6 type

109fH DI pulse constant

10a0H

Working mode of relay 1 and 2

10a1H

Output mode of relay 1 and 2

10a2H Pulse width

Default

0

0

0

Range

Bit0: DI1, Bit1: DI2

Bit2: DI3, Bit3: DI4

Bit4: DI5, Bit5: DI6

0: DI,1: pulse counter

1~65535

0: control output,

1: alarming output

0

50

0: latch, 1: pulse

50~3000ms word word word word word

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

AXM-IO21

Address Parameter

10a3H DI7~10 type

10a4H DI pulse constant

Default

0

0

Range

Bit0: DI7, Bit1: DI8

Bit2: DI9, Bit3: DI10

0: DI,1: pulse counter

1~65535

Data type Property word R/W word R/W

10a5H Working mode of DO

10a6H DO pulse width

10a7H DO1 output

10a8H DO2 output

10a9H AO1,2 type

0

20

0

0

1 or 2

0: pulse output

1: alarming output

20~1000ms

0: none

1: consumption power

2: gererating power

3: absorption reactive power

4: generating reactive power

Same as above

0: 0~20mA, 1: 4~20mA,

2: 0~5V, 3: 1~5V word word word word word

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

AXM-IO31

Address

10aaH

Parameter

DI11~14 type

10abH DI pulse constant

10acH

Working mode of relay 3 and 4

10adH

Output mode of relay 3 and 4

10aeH Pulse width

10afH AI1,2 type

Default

0

0

0

Range

Bit0: DI11,Bit1: DI12,

Bit2: DI13, Bit3: DI14

0: DI, 1: pulse counter

1~65535

0: control output,

1: alarming output

0

50

1 or 2

0: latch, 1: pulse

50~3000ms

0: 0~20mA, 1: 4~20mA,

2: 0~5V, 3: 1~5V

Data type Property word word word word word word

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

AXM-IO12

Address Parameter

10b0H DI15~20 type

10b1H DI pulse constant (high)

Default

0

0

Range

Bit0: DI15, Bit1: DI16,

Bit2: DI17, Bit3: DI18,

Bit4: DI19, Bit5: DI20

0-DI,1-pulse counter

1~65535

Data type Property word word

R/W

R/W

257

258

10b2H

Working mode of relay 5 and 6

10b3H

Output mode of relay 5 and 6

10b4H Pulse width

0

0

50

0: control output,

1: alarming output

0: latch,

1: pulse

50-3000ms word word word

R/W

R/W

R/W

AXM-IO22

Address

10b5H

10b6H

10b7H

10b8H

10b9H

10baH

10bbH

Parameter

DI21~24 type

DI pulse constant

Wo r k i n g m o d e o f

DO3,4

DO Pulse width

DO3 output

DO4 output

AO3,4 type

Default

0

0

0

20

0

0

1 or 2

Range

Bit0: DI21, Bit1: DI22,

Bit2: DI23, Bit3: DI24

0: DI, 1: pulse counter

1~65535

0: pulse output,

1: alarming output

20~1000ms

0: none

1: consumption power

2: gererating power

3: absorption reactive power

4: generating reactive power

Same as above

0: 0~20mA, 1: 4~20mA,

2: 0~5V, 3: 1~5V

Data type Property word word word word word word word

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

AXM-IO32

Address

10bcH

10bdH

10beH

Parameter

DI25~28 type

DI pulse constant

Working mode of relay

7 and 8

Default

0

0

0

Range

Bit0: DI25, Bit1: DI26,

Bit2: DI27, Bit3: DI28

0: DI, 1: pulse counter

1~65535

0: control output,

1: alarming output

Data type word word word

Property

R/W

R/W

R/W

10bfH

10c0H

10c1H

Output mode of relay

7 and 8

Pulse width

AI3,4 type

0

50

1 or 2

0: latch, 1: pulse

50~3000

0: 0~20mA, 1: 4~20mA,

2: 0~5V, 3: 1~5V word word word

R/W

R/W

R/W

AO transforming select

Address

10c2H

10c3H

10c4H

10c5H

Parameter

AO1 transforming parameter

AO2 transforming parameter

AO3 transforming parameter

AO4 transforming parameter

Default

0

0

0

0

AO transforming parameter settings

Range

Refer to following table

Refer to following table

Refer to following table

Refer to following table

Setting value

0

Ttransforming object

Frequency

3 Vc

Setting value

1

4

Setting value

2

5

6

9

12

15

18

21

24

27

Ubc

Line current of phase A

Average line current

Power of phase B

Reactive power of phase A

Reactive power of all

Apparent power of phase C

PF of B

7

10

13

16

19

22

25

28

Transforming object

Va

Average phase voltage

Uca

Line current of phase B

Neutral current

Power of phase C

Reactive power of phase B

Apparent power of phase A

Apparent power of all

PF of C

8

11

14

17

20

23

26

29

Data type word word word word

Transforming object

Vb

Uab

PF of A

PF

Property

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

Average line voltage

Line current of phase C

Power of phase A

Power of all

Reactive power of phase C

Apparent power of phase B

259

260

Address

10d0H

10d1H

10d2H

10d3H

10d4H

10d5H

Parameter

AO1 Gradient

Number Selection of input/output transfer curve

AO1 following value range setting start point

AO1 following value range setting point 2

AO1 following value range setting point 3

AO1 following value range setting end point

Default

1

AO1 output range setting start point

Range

1: 1 Gradient

2: 2 Gradient

3: 3 Gradient

Please see Note

AO type of 0~24A or 0~6:

0~4915

AO type of 4~24A or 1~6:

819~4915

10d6H

10d7H

10d8H

10d9-10E1H

10E2H-10EAH

10EBH-10F3H

AO1 output range setting point 2

AO1 output range setting point 3

AO1 output range setting end point

AO2 Gradient

Setting(same as AO1)

AO3 Gradient

Setting(same as AO1)

AO4 Gradient

Setting(same as AO1) same as AO1 same as AO1 same as AO1

Data type Property

INT

INT

INT

INT

INT

INT

INT

INT

INT

INT

INT

INT

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

Note:

1) AO Gradient Number Selection of input/output transfer curve

When number is 1, only AO following value range setting start point, AO

following value range setting end point, AO1 output range setting start point and AO1 output range setting end point should be set.

When number is 2, only AO following value range setting start point, AO1 following value range setting point 2, AO following value range setting end point, AO1 output range setting start point , AO1 output range setting point 2 and AO1 output range setting end point should be set.

When number is 3, only AO following value range setting start point, AO1 following value range setting point 2, AO1 following value range setting point 3 and AO following value range setting end point should be set. At the same time,

AO1 output range setting start point, AO1 output range setting point 2, AO1 output range setting point 3 and AO1 output range setting end point should be set.

2) following value range setting:

AO following value range setting start point, AO1 following value range setting point 2, AO1 following value range setting point 3 and AO following value range setting end point are increasing value, while they should be within range of AO following value. Otherwise, the function of AO will be affected.

Frequency: 45HZ~65HZ, real setting value is 4500~6500.

Phase voltage V1, V2, V3 and average phase voltage: 0~480V, real setting value is 0~4800.

Line voltage V12, V23, V31 and average line voltage: 0~831V, real setting value is

0~8310.

Current I1, I2, I3 and average current: 0~10A, real setting value is 0~10000.

Power Pa, Pb and Pc: -4800~4800W, real setting value is -4800~4800

261

262

System power: -14400~14400W, real setting value is -14400~14400.

Reactive power Qa, Qb and Qc: -4800~4800 Var, real setting value is-4800~4800.

System reactive power: -14400~14400 Var.

Apparent power Sa, Sb and Sc: 0~4800VA, real setting value is 0~4800.

System apparent power: 0~14400VA, real setting value is 0~14400.

Power factor PFa, PFb, PFc and System power factor: -1~1, real setting value is

-1000~1000.

3) AO output range setting:

AO output value range setting start point, AO1 output value range setting point

2, AO1 output value range setting point 3 and AO output value range setting end point are increasing value, while they should be within range of AO output value.

When AO type is 0~20mA, the setting value range is 0~ 4915, and the relationship is mA=setting value*20/4096.

When AO type is 4~20mA, the setting value range is 819~ 4915, and the relationship is mA=setting value*20/4096.

When AO type is 0~5V, the setting value range is 0~ 4915, and the relationship is V=setting value*5/4096.

When AO type is 1~5V, the setting value range is 819~ 4915, and the relationship is V=setting value*5/4096.

6.3.6 Metering Parameter Address Table

Basic Analog measurements

There are two different modes to read basic analog measurements, one is secondary mode, and another is primary mode. In primary mode, the numerical value in the register of the meter is equal to the real physical value. In secondary mode, the relationship between the numerical value in the register and the real physical value is shown in the following table. (Rx is the numerical value in register of Acuvim II series meter)

Function code: 03H for reading.

Address Parameter

4000H~4001H Frequency

4002H~4003H Phase voltage V1

4004H~4005H Phase voltage V2

4006H~4007H Phase voltage V3

4008H~4009H Average voltage Vavg

400aH~400bH Line voltage V12

400cH~400dH Line voltage V23

400eH~400fH Line voltage V31

4010H~4011H

Average line voltage

Vlavg

4012H~4013H Phase(line)current I1

4014H~4015H Phase(line)current I2

4016H~4017H Phase(line)current I3

4018H~4019H Average current Iavg

401aH~401bH Neutral current In

401cH~401dH Phase A power Pa

401eH~401fH Phase B power Pb

4020H~4021H Phase C power Pc

4022H~4023H System power Psum

4024H~4025H

Phase A reactive power Qa

4026H~4027H

Phase B reactive power

Qb

Code Relationship

F1 F = Rx

F1 U=Rx×(PT1/PT2)

F1 U=Rx×(PT1/PT2)

F1 U=Rx×(PT1/PT2)

F1 U=Rx×(PT1/PT2)

F1 U=Rx×(PT1/PT2)

F1 U=Rx×(PT1/PT2)

F1 U=Rx×(PT1/PT2)

F1 U=Rx×(PT1/PT2)

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

I=Rx×(CT1/CT2)

I=Rx×(CT1/CT2)

I=Rx×(CT1/CT2)

I=Rx×(CT1/CT2)

I=Rx×(CT1/CT2)

P=Rx×(PT1/PT2)×(CT1/CT2)

P=Rx×(PT1/PT2)×(CT1/CT2)

P=Rx×(PT1/PT2)×(CT1/CT2)

P=Rx×(PT1/PT2)×(CT1/CT2)

Q=Rx×(PT1/PT2)×(CT1/CT2)

Q=Rx×(PT1/PT2)×(CT1/CT2)

Property

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

Data type float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float R

263

264

4028H~4029H

402aH~402bH

402cH~402dH

402eH~402fH

4030H~4031H

4032H~4033H

4034H~4035H

4036H~4037H

4038H~4039H

403aH~403bH

Phase C reactive power Qc

System reactive power

Qsum

Phase A apparent power Sa

Phase B apparent power Sb

Phase C apparent power Sc

System apparent power Ssum

Phase A power factor

PFa

Phase B power factor

PFb

Phase C power factor

PFc

System power factor

PFsum

403cH~403dH

403eH~403fH

Voltage unbalance factor U_unbl

Current unbalance factor I_unbl

4040H~4041H

Load characteristic(L/C/

R)

4042H~4043H Power demand

4044H~4045H

4046H~4047H

Reactive power demand

Apparent power demand

F1 Q=Rx×(PT1/PT2)×(CT1/CT2)

F1 Q=Rx×(PT1/PT2)×(CT1/CT2)

F1 S=Rx×(PT1/PT2)×(CT1/CT2)

F1 S=Rx×(PT1/PT2)×(CT1/CT2)

F1 S=Rx×(PT1/PT2)×(CT1/CT2)

F1 S=Rx×(PT1/PT2)×(CT1/CT2)

F1 PF = Rx

F1 PF = Rx

F1 PF = Rx

F1 PF = Rx

F1 Unbalance = Rx × 100%

F1 Unbalance = Rx × 100%

F1 76.0/67.0/82.0(ASCII)

F1 P=Rx×(PT1/PT2)×(CT1/CT2)

F1 P=Rx×(PT1/PT2)×(CT1/CT2)

F1 P=Rx×(PT1/PT2)×(CT1/CT2)

Note: when transformers are set to 330mV, take CT2 as 1.

float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

Real time energy measurement

Data stored in this block can be preset or cleared.

Function code: 03H for reading, 10H for writing. Data type: dword.

It can be set as primary energy or secondary energy according to user. Please refer to F7, F8, and F9 for more details about the relationship between numerical value in the register and the real physical value.

Address Parameter

4048H~4049H Energy IMP

404aH~404bH Energy EXP

404cH~404dH Reactive energy IMP

404eH~404fH Reactive energy EXP

4050H~4051H Energy TOTAL

4052H~4053H Energy NET

4054H~4055H Reactive energy TOTAL

4056H~4057H Reactive energy NET

4058H~4059H Apparent energy

4620H~4621H Phase A Energy IMP

4622H~4623H Phase A Energy EXP

4624H~4625H Phase B Energy IMP

4626H~4627H Phase B Energy EXP

4628H~4629H Phase C Energy IMP

462AH~462BH Phase C Energy EXP

462CH~462DH

Phase A Reactive energy

IMP

462EH~462FH

4630H~4631H

Phase A Reactive energy

EXP

Phase B Reactive energy

IMP

F5/F8

Code

F4/F7

F4/F7

F5/F8

F5/F8

F4/F7

F4/F7

F5/F8

F5/F8

F6/F9

F4/F7

F4/F7

F4/F7

F4/F7

F4/F7

F4/F7

F5/F8

F5/F8

Range

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

-999999999~

999999999

0~999999999

-999999999~

999999999

0~999999999

0-999999999

0-999999999

0-999999999

0-999999999

0-999999999

0-999999999

0-999999999

Data type dword dword dword dword dword dword dword dword dword dword dword dword dword dword dword dword

0-999999999 dword

0-999999999 dword

Property

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

265

266

4632H~4633H

4634H~4635H

Phase B Reactive energy

EXP

Phase C Reactive energy

IMP

F5/F8

F5/F8

4636H~4637H

Phase C Reactive energy

EXP

F5/F8

4638H~4639H Phase A Apparent energy F6/F9

463AH~463BH Phase B Apparent energy F6/F9

463CH~463DH Phase C Apparent energy F6/F9

0-999999999

0-999999999

0-999999999

0-999999999

0-999999999

0-999999999 dword dword dword dword dword dword

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

Harmonics

THD, Harmonics, odd HD, even HD, Crest Factor, THFF, K factor etc are all stored here. The data type is “word”. Voltage parameters refer to line voltage when it is set to “2LL/3LL” and phase voltage for others. Function code: 03H for reading.

Address Parameter Code

The following are the THD of voltage and current

405aH

405bH

405cH

THD_V1 of V1(V12)

THD_V1 of V2(V31)

THD_V1 of V3(V23)

F18

F18

F18

Range

>=0

>=0

>=0

Data type word word word

405dH

405eH

405fH

4060H

Average THD_V

THD_I1

THD_I2

THD_I3

F18

F18

F18

F18

>=0

>=0

>=0

>=0 word word word word

4061H Average THD_I F18 >=0 word

Voltage Harmonics, even HD, odd HD, Crest Factor are shown as below

F19 >=0 word

Property

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

4080H

4081H

4082H

Odd HD of V1(V12)

Even HD of V1(V12)

Crest Factor of V1(V12)

F19

F20

F21

F22

>=0

>=0

>=0

0~65535 word word word word

R

R

R

R

4083H THFF of V1(V12)

4084H~40a5H Parameters of V2(V31)

40a6H~40c7H Parameters of V3(V23)

F24 >=0

Same as V1

F19 >=0

Same as V1

F19 >=0

Current Harmonics, even HD, odd HD, K factor are shown as below

F19 >=0 word word word word word word

R

R

R

R

R

R

4560H~457fH Harmonics of I1

)

40e6H

40e7H

Odd HD of I1

Even HD of I1

40e8H K Factor of I1

40e9H~4109H Parameters of I2

4580H~459fH Harmonics of I2

)

410aH~412aH Parameters of I3

45a0H~45bfH Harmonics of I3

)

MAX/MIN records

F19 >=0

Same as I1

F19 >=0 word word word

MAX/MIN value and time stamp. Function code: 03H for reading.

Address

4136H

4137H~413cH

413dH

413eH~4143H

4144H

4145H~414aH

Parameter

MAX of V1

Time stamp: yyyy:mm: dd:hh:mm:ss

MAX of V2

Time stamp: yyyy:mm: dd:hh:mm:ss

MAX of V3

Time stamp: yyyy:mm: dd:hh:mm:ss

Code

F11

F3

F11

F3

F11

F3

F19 >=0

F20

F21

>=0

>=0

F23 0~65535

Same as I1

Range

-32768~32767 time

-32768~32767 time

-32768~32767 time word word word word word

Data type Property int R int R int int int int

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

267

268

414bH

414cH~4151H

4152H

4153H~4158H

4159H

415aH~415fH

4160H

4161H~4166H

4167H

4168H~416dH

416eH

416fH~4174H

4175H

4176H~417bH

417cH

417dH~4182H

4183H

4184H~4189H

418aH

418bH~4190H

4191H

4192H~4197H

MAX of V12

Time stamp: yyyy:mm: dd:hh:mm:ss

MAX of V23

Time stamp: yyyy:mm: dd:hh:mm:ss

MAX of V31

Time stamp: yyyy:mm: dd:hh:mm:ss

MAX of I1

Time stamp: yyyy:mm: dd:hh:mm:ss

MAX of I2

Time stamp: yyyy:mm: dd:hh:mm:ss

MAX of I3

Time stamp: yyyy:mm: dd:hh:mm:ss

MAX of system power

Time stamp: yyyy:mm: dd:hh:mm:ss

MAX of system reactive power

Time stamp: yyyy:mm: dd:hh:mm:ss

MAX of system

apparent power

Time stamp: yyyy:mm: dd:hh:mm:ss

MAX of power factor

Time stamp: yyyy:mm: dd:hh:mm:ss

MAX of frequency

Time stamp: yyyy:mm: dd:hh:mm:ss

F14

F3

F15

F3

F16

F3

F10

F3

F12

F3

F12

F3

F12

F3

F3

F13

F3

F11

F3

F11

F3

F11

-32768~32767 time

-32768~32767 time

-32768~32767 time

-32768~32767 time

-32768~32767 time

-32768~32767 time

-32768~32767 time

-32768~32767 time

-32768~32767 time

-32768~32767 time

-32768~32767 time int int int int int int int int int int int int int int int int int int int int int int

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

4198H

4199H~419eH

419fH

41a0H~41a5H

41a6H

41a7H~41acH

41adH

41aeH~41b3H

41b4H

41b5H~41baH

41bbH

41bcH~41c1H

41c2H

41c3H~41c8H

41c9H

41caH~41cfH

41d0H

41d1H~41d6H

41d7H

41d8H~41ddH

41deH

MAX of power demand

Time stamp: yyyy:mm: dd:hh:mm:ss

MAX of reactive power demand

Time stamp: yyyy:mm: dd:hh:mm:ss

MAX of apparent power demand

Time stamp: yyyy:mm: dd:hh:mm:ss

M A X o f v o l t a g e unbalance factor

Time stamp: yyyy:mm: dd:hh:mm:ss

M A X o f c u r r e n t unbalance factor

Time stamp: yyyy:mm: dd:hh:mm:ss

MAX of V1(V12) THD

Time stamp: yyyy:mm: dd:hh:mm:ss

MAX of V2(V31) THD

Time stamp: yyyy:mm: dd:hh:mm:ss

MAX of V3(V23) THD

Time stamp: yyyy:mm: dd:hh:mm:ss

MAX of I1 THD

Time stamp: yyyy:mm: dd:hh:mm:ss

MAX of I2 THD

Time stamp: yyyy:mm: dd:hh:mm:ss

MAX of I3 THD

F3

F15

F3

F17

F3

F17

F3

F18

F3

F18

F3

F18

F3

F18

F3

F18

F3

F18

F13

F3

F14

-32768~32767 time

-32768~32767 time

-32768~32767 time

-32768~32767 time

-32768~32767 time

-32768~32767 time

-32768~32767 time

-32768~32767 time

-32768~32767 time

-32768~32767 time

-32768~32767 int int int int int int int int int int int int int int int int int int int int int

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

269

270

41dfH~41e4H

Time stamp: yyyy:mm: dd:hh:mm:ss

F3 time int R

The addresses for the MIN value of the above parameters are located in 41e5H to 4293H. They have the same format as the MAX value.

Sequence component

U1 (U12), I1 are consisting of real part and complex part. They have positive sequence, negative sequence and zero sequence. Data type is “int”. Function code: 03H for reading.

Address Parameter

4294H positive sequence real part of UA

4295H positive sequence complex part of UA

4296H negative sequence real part of UA

4297H negative sequence complex part of UA

4298H zero sequence real part of UA

4299H zero sequence complex part of UA

429aH positive sequence real part of IA

429bH positive sequence complex part of IA

429cH negative sequence real part of IA

429dH negative sequence complex part of IA

429eH zero sequence real part of IA

429fH zero sequence complex part of IA

Code Range

F11 -32768~32767

F11 -32768~32767

F11 -32768~32767

F11 -32768~32767

F11 -32768~32767

F11 -32768~32767

F12 -32768~32767

F12 -32768~32767

F12 -32768~32767

F12 -32768~32767

F12 -32768~32767

F12 -32768~32767 int int int int int int

Data type int int int int int int

Phase angle

All voltage and current’s phase angles corresponding to V1 (V12) are stored here. You can find out the phase sequence according to them. Data type is

“word”. Function code: 03H for reading.

Address

42a0H

Parameter phase angle of V2 to V1 V1/

V2(3$4) phase angle of V23 to V12

V12/V23(3$3)

Code

F25

Range

0~3600

Data type word

Property

R

Property

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

42a1H

42a2H

42a3H

42a4H

42a5H

42a6H

42a7H

42a8H phase angle of V3 to V1 V1/

V3(3$4) phase angle of V31 to V12

V12/V31 (3$3) phase angle of I1 to V1 V1/

I1(3$4) phase angle of I1 to V12

V12/I1 (3$3) phase angle of I2 to V1 V1/

I2(3$4) phase angle of I2 to V12

V12/I2 (3$3) phase angle of I3 to V1 V1/

I3(3$4) phase angle of I3 to V12

V12/I3 (3$3)

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

F25

F25

F25

F25

0~3600

0~3600

0~3600

0~3600 word word word word word word word word

R

R

R

R

Alarming records

There are 16 groups of records with the same format. Function code: 03H for reading, 10H for writing. Please refer to Chapter 4 for more details.

Address

42a9H

42aaH

42abH

42acH~42b2H

Parameter Code

First group: alarming status

First group: alarming parameter code

First group: over/under limit or reset value

First group: Time stamp: yyyy:mm:dd:hh:mm:ss:ms

F1

F1

F10~F18

F3

Range

0~65535

0~50

Related with parameters

Data type word word word word

Property

R

R

R

R

271

272

42b3H~42bcH Second group

42bdH~42c6H Third group

42c7H~42d0H Fourth group

42d1H~42daH Fifth group

42dbH~42e4H Sixth group

42e5H~42eeH Seventh group

42efH~42f8H Eighth group

42f9H~4302H Ninth group

4303H~430cH Tenth group

430dH~4316H Eleventh group

4317H~4320H Twelfth group

4321H~432aH Thirteenth group

432bH~4334H Fourteenth group

4335H~433eH Fifteenth group

433fH~4348H Sixteenth group

Same as the first group

Same as the first group

Same as the first group

Same as the first group

Same as the first group

Same as the first group

Same as the first group

Same as the first group

Same as the first group

Same as the first group

Same as the first group

Same as the first group

Same as the first group

Same as the first group

Same as the first group

Counting number of I/O Modules

DI are arranged according to expanded I/O module addresses, user can check othe counting number of DI along with those modules. The DI counting records are stored in a non-volatile memory and will not be erased during power off.

They can be reset via communication and panel.Data type is “dword”. Function code: 03H for reading.

Address

AXM-IO11

Parameter

4349H~434aH DI1 pulse counter number

434bH~434cH DI2 pulse counter number

434dH~434eH DI3 pulse counter number

434fH~4350H DI4 pulse counter number

4351H~4352H DI5 pulse counter number

4353H~4354H DI6 pulse counter number

AXM-IO21

4355H~4356H DI7 pulse counter number

Code

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

Range

0~4294967295

0~4294967295

0~4294967295

0~4294967295

0~4294967295

0~4294967295

0~4294967295

Data type Property dword dword dword dword dword dword dword

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

4357H~4358H DI8 pulse counter number

4359H~435aH DI9 pulse counter number

435bH~435cH DI10 pulse counter number

AXM-IO31

435dH~435eH DI11 pulse counter number

435fH~4360H DI12 pulse counter number

4361H~4362H DI13 pulse counter number

4363H~4364H DI14 pulse counter number

AXM-IO12

4365H~4366H DI15 pulse counter number

4367H~4368H DI16 pulse counter number

4369H~436aH DI17 pulse counter number

436bH~436cH DI18 pulse counter number

436dH~436eH DI19 pulse counter number

436fH~4370H DI20 pulse counter number

AXM-IO22

4371H~4372H DI21 pulse counter number

4373H~4374H DI22 pulse counter number

4375H~4376H DI23 pulse counter number

4377H~4378H DI24 pulse counter number

AXM-IO32

4379H~437aH DI25 pulse counter number

437bH~437cH DI26 pulse counter number

437dH~437eH DI27 pulse counter number

437fH~4380H DI28 pulse counter number

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

0~4294967295

0~4294967295

0~4294967295 dword dword dword

0~4294967295

0~4294967295

0~4294967295

0~4294967295 dword dword dword dword

0~4294967295

0~4294967295

0~4294967295

0~4294967295

0~4294967295

0~4294967295 dword dword dword dword dword dword

0~4294967295

0~4294967295

0~4294967295

0~4294967295 dword dword dword dword

0~4294967295

0~4294967295

0~4294967295

0~4294967295 dword dword dword dword

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

AI input value

The output of AI is mapped to the range of 0~4095 according to its sampling value using some algorithm. Data type is “word”. Function code: 03H for reading. Please refer to Chapter 5 Extended Modules for more details.

273

274

Address

4385H

4386H

4387H

4388H

Parameter

AI1 sampling value

AI2 sampling value

AI3 sampling value

AI4 sampling value

Code

F1

F1

F1

F1

Range

0~4095

0~4095

0~4095

0~4095

Data type word word word word

Property

R

R

R

R

AO output

The output of AO is the actual value of output. There are 2 output options for

AO - V or mA. Over/under limit or Data type is “float”. Function code: 03H for reading. Please refer to Chapter 5 Extended Modules for more details.

Address

4389H - 438aH

438bH - 438cH

438dH - 438eH

438fH - 4390H

Parameter

Value of A01

Value of A02

Value of A03

Value of A04

Code

F1

F1

F1

F1

Range Data type float float float float

Property

R

R

R

R

SOE Records

There are 20 groups of records with the same format. Function code: 03H for reading. Before gathering SOE records, the selected I/O module must be SOE enabled. If the SOE enabled I/O module is not connected, SOE record logs will not be collected. Please refer to Chapter 5 Extended Modules for more details.

Address

4399H~439fH

Parameter

First group: time stamp: yyyy:mm:dd:hh:mm:ss:ms

43a0H First group: DI status

43a1H~4438H 2 nd

to 20 th

group

Code

F3

F1

Range Data type Property word word word

R

R

R

4439H I/O module of SOE F1

0:none;

1:AXM-IO11;

2:AXM-IO21;

3:AXM-IO31;

4:AXM-IO12;

5:AXM-IO22;

6:AXM-IO32 word R

Current demand

Include real-time current demand, the maximum current demand and time of occurance. Function code: 03H for reading.

Address Parameter

4600H-4601H Phase A current demand

4602H-4603H Phase B current demand

4604H-4605H Phase C current demand

4606H

4607-460cH

460dH

460e-4613H

4614H

4615-461AH

Max of Phase A current demand

Time stamp: yyyy:mm:dd:hh:mm:ss

Max of Phase B current demand

Time stamp: yyyy:mm:dd:hh:mm:ss

Max of Phase C current demand

Time stamp: yyyy:mm:dd:hh:mm:ss

DI Status

Code

F1

F1

F1

F12

F3

F12

F3

F12

F3

Range

I=Rx×(CT1/CT2)

I=Rx×(CT1/CT2)

I=Rx×(CT1/CT2)

-32768~32767

Time

-32768~32767

Time

-32768~32767

Time

Data type Property

float R float float

R

R int int

R

R int int int

int

R

R

R

R

Current DI status, if related I/O module isn’t connected, the DI status will be set to 0. Function code: 02H for reading.

Address

AXM-IO11

0000H

0001H

0002H

0003H

0004H

0005H

AXM-IO21

0006H

Parameter

DI1

DI2

DI3

DI4

DI5

DI6

DI7

Range

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

Data type bit bit bit bit bit bit bit

275

276

0007H

0008H

0009H

AXM-IO31

000aH

000bH

000cH

000dH

AXM-IO12

000eH

000fH

0010H

0011H

0012H

0013H

AXM-IO22

0014H

0015H

0016H

0017H

AXM-IO32

0018H

0019H

001aH

001bH

DI8

DI9

DI10

DI11

DI12

DI13

DI14

DI15

DI16

DI17

DI18

DI19

DI20

DI21

DI22

DI23

DI24

DI25

DI26

DI27

DI28

Relay status

Function code: 01H for reading, 05H for controlling output.

Address

AXM-IO11

0000H

0001H

Parameter

Relay1

Relay2

Range

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

Data type bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit

AXM-IO31

0002H

0003H

AXM-IO12

0004H

0005H

AXM-IO32

0006H

0007H

6.3.7 Data Logging

Relay3

Relay4

Relay5

Relay6

Relay7

Relay8

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF

1=ON,0=OFF bit bit bit bit bit bit

Data Logging Setting

In order to generate historical logs for the selected parameters, users should program the meter so that selected parameters from the cooresponding

Modbus registers can be copied to the historical log record. Since certain parameters occupy two registers, to supplement this, the programmable settings for the historical logs contain a list of descriptors. Each descriptor lists the number of Modbus registers for the specified parameter. By combining these two lists, the historical log record can be interpreted.

For example: Registers 4002H and 4003H are programmed to be recorded by the historical log. Since 2 registers are used, the corresponding descriptor is set as 2. These registers program the log to record “Volts AN.”

The historical log programmable settings are comprised of 3 blocks, one for each log. Each log works identical to each other; therefore, only historical log

1 is described here. All register addresses in this section are shown within the address range of historical log 1.

1100H-11DFH (Historical Log 1)

11C0H-127FH (Historical Log 2)

1280H-133FH (Historical Log 3)

277

278

Block Size: 192 registers per log (384 bytes)

Data Log Setting’s address map :

1100H - 1101H

Header

1102H – 1176H

Register List

The following are the details.

1) Header:

Registers 1100H-1101H

Size 2 Registers

1177H – 11b1H

Item Descriptor List

11B2H - 11B5H

Logging Timer setting

Address

Byte

Value

0(low byte)

Sectors

1100H

1(high byte)

Registers

1101H

2(low byte) 3(high byte)

Interval

Registers: The number of registers to log in the record range from {0-117}. The size of the record in memory is [12 + (Registers x 2)].

Sectors: The number of memory sectors allocated to this log. Each sector is

64kb in size. 100 sectors are available for allocation among the three historical logs. Valid allocation range is from 0-100 (When the sector is set 0,this log is disable).

Interval: The data capture interval for historical log records. Valid time interval can be set from 0-1440 minutes. When the interval is set to 0, this log is disable.

2) Register List:

Registers: 1102H-1176H

Size: 1 or 2 register(s) per parameter, 117 available registers per historical log.

The register list controls which Modbus registers are recorded in each historical log record. Since many parameters, such as Voltage, Energy, etc., take up more than 1 register, multiple registers are allocated for those parameters.

For example: In order to record "Volts AN" into the historical log, Volts AN's

Modbus address (4002H and 4003H) are assigned and programmed to the log record list so that information can be stored into the historical log registers.

• Each unused register item should be set to 0000H or FFFFH to indicate no parameters are associated with them.

• The actual size of the record, and the number of items in the register list which are used, is determined by the registers in the header.

• Valid register address ranges that can be recorded in the historical log registers are 4000H-412BH, 4294H-42A8H, 4349H-4398H, 4500H-461BH.

3) Item Descriptor List:

Registers: 1177H– 11B1H

Size: 1 byte per item, 117 bytes (59 registers)

While the register list describes what to log, the Item descriptor list describes how to interpret that information. Each descriptor describes how many Modbus addresses are used to describe a parameter. Either 1 or 2 addresses will be used for each parameter.

For example: If the first descriptor is 2, and the second descriptor is 1, then the first 2 register items belong to the 1 st

descriptor, and the 3 rd

register item belongs to the 2 nd

descriptor.

NOTE: As can be seen from the example above, it is not a 1-to-1 relation between the register list and the descriptor list. A single descriptor may refer to two register items.

4) Logging Timer setting

If data logging only record one period data, or only start from one specific time, corresponding time and logging mode should be set then data logging can work well.

279

280

Modbus address 11B2H is used as the logging mode select. When value is 0, logging mode is set to mode1, without time setting. When value is 1, logging mode is set to mode2, so 11B3H-11B5H (start year, month, day, hour, minute, and second) and 11B6H-11B8H (end year, month, day, hour, minute, and second) should be set. When value is 2, logging mode is set to mode3, so only

11B4H (hour) and 11B5H (minute) should be set. How data logging works is in

Chapter 4.

Size 2 Registers

Byte value

0 month

1 year

2 hour

3 day

4 second

Log Status Block

The Log Status Block describes the current status of the log in question.

5 minute

Address Parameter

6100H~6101H Max Records

6102H~6103H Used Records

6104H Record Size

6105H Reserved

6106H~6108H First Record Time stamp

6109H~610bH Last Record Time stamp

6200H~620bH Data logging 2 status

6300H~630bH Data logging 3 status

Range

0~468104

1~468104

14 – 246

Data type dword dword word word word word

Same as the first group

Same as the first group

Property

R

R

R

R

R

R

Max Records: The maximum number of records the log can hold given the record size and sector allocation.

Used Records: The number of records stored in the log. This number will equal the Max Records when the log has filled. This value will be set to 1 when the log is reset.

Record Size: The number of bytes in this record, including the time stamp.

The record's format in the meter is: record number(4bytes)+ time stamp(6bytes)

+ [data1~dataN](2Nbytes) + CRC(2bytes).

First Record Time stamp: Time stamp of the oldest record.

Last Record Time stamp: Time stamp of the newest record.

Log Retrieval Block

The log retrieval block consists of 2 parts: the header and the window. The header is used to verify the data shown within the requested log window. The window is a sliding block of data that can be used to access any record in the specified log.

Registers 6000H-6003H

Size 4 Registers

Address

6000H

Parameter

Log type

6001H

Record number, status

6002H~6003H offset

6004H~607eH window

Property

R/W

R/W

R/W

R

Format

Nnnnnnnn ssssssss nnnnnnnn

wwwwwwww

Description log type reserve record number status

Log type: The log to be retrieved. Write this value to set which log is being retrieved.

0 -Historical Log 1

1 -Historical Log 2

2 -Historical Log 3

Records number: The number of records that fit within a window. This value is settable, any number less than a full window may be used. This number tells the

281

282 retrieving program how many records to expect to be fetched in the window.

(record number x Record Size) = bytes used in the window. This value should be

((123 x 2) / Record Size), rounded down. The greater this number is, the faster the retrieving speed is.

For example, with a record size of 50, the Records number = ((123 x 2) / 50)

=4.92 ~= 4.

Status: The status of the current window. Since the time to prepare a window may exceed an acceptable Modbus delay (1 second), this acts as a ready status flag to notify when the window is ready for retrieval. When this value indicates that the window is not ready, the data in the window should be ignored.

Window Status is Read-only, any writes are ignored.

This value also indicates the memory erasing status when setting the date logging settings.

bH Window is Ready

FFH Window is Not Ready aaH memory is erasing bbH memory erasing is finished

Offset: The offset of the record number of the first record in the data window and the record number of the "first record time stamp". Setting this value controls which records will be available in the data window. When the log is retrieved, the first (oldest) record is “latched.” This means that offset 0 will always point to the oldest record at the time of latching.

Window: The actual data of the records, arranged according to the above settings.

Note: If the logging timer is disabled, the first recording sector will be erased when the log is full. Therefore, user should not read the whole log when the

used record numer is near to the max record number. Under this condition, user should read the "Used Records" field and compare it to the previous "Used

Records" field from the last reading before retrieving the information and reading the window.

If the current "Used Records" field is greater than the "Used Records" field from the last reading and if the "Offset" field is less than the difference between the current and previous "Used Records" field, the first sector has been erased and the difference between the "Used Records" field should be subtracted from the recording number.

If the "Offset" field is greater than the difference between the current and previous "Used Records" field, the "Offset" number should be subtracted from the recording number.

To avoid this situation, user should read the log before it is almost full.

For example: Data logging 1 has 3 sectors and each has 448 records, and the total records are 1344. If you press the "Read All" button when the

"Used Records" number is at 1340 and if the first sector is erased before the information is transferred to the computer, the data stored in this sector is erased permanently and cannot be retrieved. If the records from the first sector can be retrieved before it gets erased, the new value of "Offset" will equal to the original "Offset" field minus the value of the difference between the current and previous "Used Records" field.

Data logging opration examples

The following example illustrates a data logging opertation. The example makes the following assumptions:

• The log is Historical Log 1.

283

284

• The Log contains VAN, VBN, VCN (12 bytes),the interval is 1min, the sectors is

10,the registers is 6, the logging timer function is disabled.

• Retrieval is starting at record offset 0 (oldest record).

• No new records are recorded to the log during the log retrieval process.

a) Data logging settings

Now set the data log 1 according to the assumptions:

1. Set the data log with VAN, VBN, VCN, here we should set their modbus address 0x4002,0x4003,0x4004,0x4005,0x4006 and 0x4007 to 0x1102, 0x1103,

0x1104, 0x1105, 0x1106 and 0x1107. And the discripter is 2,so set the 0x0202 and 0x0200 to 0x1177 and 0x1178.

2. The register is 6 and sector is 10, so we set 0x060A to 0x1100.

3. The interval is 1min , so set the 0x0001 to 0x1101.

4. The logging timer function is disabled, so set the 0 to 0x11b9.

b) Log Retrieval Procedure

The following procedure documents how to retrieve a single log from the oldest record to the newest record.

1. Compute the number of records per window, as follows:

RecordsPerWindow = (246 \ RecordSize)=246\24=10.

2. Write the Records per window and Record offset, in this example set the

0x0A0B and 0x0000 to 0x6001d and 0x6002.

This step tells the meter what data to return in the window.

3. Read the record window status from 0x6001.

• If the Window Status is 0xFF, go to step 2.

• If the Window Status is 0x0B, Read the data window.

4. Read the data window and compute next Expected Record offset.

• Compute the next expected record offset by adding Records Per Window and go to step 2.

• If there are no remaining records after the current record window, stop reading.

6.3.8 Time of use

Data address of TOU energy

The data address save the parameter of energy, which includes Data address of last month TOU energy, Data address of current month TOU energy, Data address of TOU parameter setting and Data address of TOU default parameter.

Except for the data address of TOU default parameter, the data address is read with 03 code, preset with 16 code.

Data address of prior month TOU

Data address of

TOU energy

Data address of current month TOU

Data address of TOU parameter setting

Data adress of TOU default parameter

Basis parameter of TOU

Season parameter setting of TOU

Schdule setting of TOU

Holiday setting of TOU

Basis default parameter of TOU

Season default parameter setting of TOU

Schedule default setting of TOU

Holiday default setting of TOU

Fig 6-1 Division plan of TOU energy

285

286 address

7200H~7201H

7202H~7203H

7204H~7205H

7206H~7207H

7208H~7209H

720AH~720BH

720CH~720DH

720EH~720FH

7210H~7211H

7212H~7213H

7214H~7215H

7216H~7217H

7218H~7219H

721AH~721BH

721CH~721DH

721EH~721FH

7220H~7221H

7222H~7223H

7224H~7225H

7226H~7227H

7228H~7229H

722AH~722BH

722CH~722DH

722EH~722FH

7230H~7231H

Current month TOU energy parameter

Ep_imp(sharp)

Ep_exp(sharp)

Eq_im(sharp)

Eq_exp(sharp)

Es(sharp)

Ep_imp(peak)

Ep_exp(peak)

Eq_imp(peak)

Eq_exp(peak)

Es(peak)

Ep_imp(valley)

Ep_exp(valley)

Eq_imp(valley)

Eq_exp(valley)

Es(valley)

Ep_imp(normal)

Ep_exp(normal)

Eq_imp(normal)

Eq_exp(normal)

Es(normal)

Ep_imp(sum)

Ep_exp(sum)

Eq_imp(sum)

Eq_exp(sum)

Es(sum) range

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

Data type

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Type of access

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

7232H~7233H

7234H~7235H

7236H~7237H

7238H~7239H

723AH~723BH

723CH~723DH

723EH~723FH

7240H~7241H

7242H~7243H

7244H~7245H

7246H~7247H

7248H~7249H

724AH~724BH

724CH~724DH

724EH~724FH

7250H~7251H

7252H~7253H

7254H~7255H

7256H~7257H

7258H~7259H

725AH~725BH

725CH~725DH

725EH~725FH

7260H~7261H

7262H~7263H

Table 6-25 Data address of last and current month

Ep_imp(sharp)

Ep_exp(sharp)

Eq_imp(sharp)

Eq_exp(sharp)

Es(sharp)

Last month TOU energy

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

Ep_imp(peak)

Ep_exp(peak)

Eq_imp(peak)

Eq_exp(peak)

Es(peak)

Ep_imp(valley)

Ep_exp(valley)

Eq_imp(valley)

Eq_exp(valley)

Es(valley)

Ep_imp(normal)

Ep_exp(normal)

Eq_imp(normal)

Eq_exp(normal)

Es(normal)

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

Ep_imp(sum)

Ep_exp(sum)

Eq_imp(sum)

Eq_exp(sum)

Es(sum)

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

0~999999999

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

Dword

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

287

288

The address area include the max of Ep_imp, Ep_exp, Eq_im, Eq_exp, Es, Current demand and time stamp, When tariff setting parameter is sharp, peak, valley and normal. Function: 03H Read.

Range

Data type

Type of access

Address Parameter

7500H~7503H

Max of Ep_imp (sharp) demand and time stamp

(format: power; year/mon; Day/Hour; Min/

Sec)

-32768~32767 Int R

-32768~32767 Int R

-32768~32767 Int

-32768~32767 Int

R

R

7510H~7513H Max of Es(sharp) demand and time stamp -32768~32767 Int

7514H~7517H Max of Ia(sharp) demand and time stamp -32768~32767 Int

7518H~751bH Max of Ib(sharp) demand and time stamp -32768~32767 Int

751cH~751fH Max of Ic(sharp) demand and time stamp -32768~32767 Int

-32768~32767 Int

-32768~32767 Int

-32768~32767 Int

7530H~7533H Max of Es(peak) demand and time stamp

7534H~7537H Max of Ia (peak)demand and time stamp

7538H~753bH Max of Ib (peak)demand and time stamp

753cH~753fH Max of Ic (peak) demand and time stamp

-32768~32767 Int

-32768~32767 Int

-32768~32767 Int

-32768~32767 Int

-32768~32767 Int

-32768~32767 Int

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

-32768~32767 Int

-32768~32767 Int

-32768~32767 Int

7550H~7553H Max of Es(valley) demand and time stamp -32768~32767 Int

7554H~7557H Max of Ia (valley)demand and time stamp -32768~32767 Int

7558H~755bH Max of Ib (valley)demand and time stamp -32768~32767 Int

755cH~755fH Max of Ic (valley) demand and time stamp -32768~32767 Int

-32768~32767 Int

-32768~32767 Int

-32768~32767 Int

-32768~32767 Int

7570H~7573H Max of Es(normal) demand and time stamp -32768~32767 Int

7574H~7577H Max of Ia (normal)demand and time stamp -32768~32767 Int

7578H~757bH Max of Ib (normal)demand and time stamp -32768~32767 Int

757cH~757fH Max of Ic (normal) demand and time stamp -32768~32767 Int

7580H~7583H Max of Ep_imp(all) demand and time stamp -32768~32767 Int

7584H~7587H Max of Ep_exp(all) demand and time stamp -32768~32767 Int

7588H~758bH Max of Eq_im(all) demand and time stamp -32768~32767 Int

758cH~758fH Max of Eq_exp(all) demand and time stamp -32768~32767 Int

7590H~7593H Max of Es(all) demand and time stamp -32768~32767 Int

7594H~7597H Max of Ia(all)demand and time stamp

7598H~759bH Max of Ib(all)demand and time stamp

759cH~759fH Max of Ic(all) demand and time stamp

-32768~32767 Int

-32768~32767 Int

-32768~32767 Int

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

The address area include Daylight saving time(DST) setting. Function: 03H Read,

10H Preset.

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

289

290

Address

7700H

7701H

770CH

770DH

770EH

770FH

7710H

7711H

7712H

7713H

7714H

7715H

7716H

7717H

7702H

7703H

7704H

7705H

7706H

7707H

7708H

7709H

770AH

770BH

Parameter Range

Data type

Type of access

DST enable

DST format

0: disable

1: enable

0: format 1

1: format 2

Word

Word

R/W

R/W

DST Start Mon

DST Start Day

DST Start Hour

DST Start Min

DST Start Adjust time (Unit: Min)

DST Ending Mon

DST Ending Day

DST Ending Hour

Format 1

1~12

1~31

0~23

0~59

Word R/W

Word R/W

Word R/W

Word R/W

1~120 Default: 60 Word R/W

1~12 Word R/W

1~31

0~23

Word R/W

Word R/W

DST Ending Min 0~59 Word R/W

DST Ending Adjust time (Unit: Min) 1~120 Default: 60 Word R/W

Format 2

DST Start Mon

DST Start week

1~12

0~6 0: Sunday

1~6 Monday to

Saturday

Word R/W

Word R/W

DST Start First few weeks

DST Start Hour

DST Start Min

DST Start Adjust time (Unit: Min)

DST Ending Mon

DST Ending Week

1~5

0~23

0~59

1~120 Default: 60 Word R/W

1~12

0~6 0: Sunday

1~6 Monday to

Saturday

Word

Word

R/W

R/W

Word R/W

Word R/W

Word R/W

DST Ending First few weeks

DST Ending Hour

1~5

0~23

Word R/W

Word R/W

DST Ending Min 0~59 Word R/W

DST Ending Adjust time (Unit: Min) 1~120 Default: 60 Word R/W

Data address of TOU parameter setting includes basis parameter of TOU, time zone setting parameter of TOU, time table setting parameter of TOU and holiday setting parameter of TOU. Function: 03 code, 10 reset.

Table 6-26 data address of TOU

7800H

7801H

7802H

7803H

7804H

7805H

7806H

7807H

7808H

7809H

780AH

780BH

780CH

780DH

Season Number

Schedule Number

Segment Number

Basis parameter of TOU

Tariff Number

Weekend Setting(bit0-Sunday;bit1~ bit6:Monday~Saturdaybit=1 means using energy,bit=0 means not using energy)

Weekend Schedule

0~12

0~14

0~14

0~3

0~127

0-14

0-30

1:enable

Holiday Number

Time of Use factory setting

Choice of calculation auto reset

(0: End of Momth)

TOU auto reset fixed date:day

(default is 1)

TOU auto reset fixed date:hour

(default is 0)

TOU auto reset fixed date:minute

(default is 0)

TOU auto reset fixed date:second

(default is 0)

TOU auto reset fixed date: second

(default is 0)

1:enable

1~31

0~23

0~59

0~59

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

291

292

780EH

7820H~7822H

7823H~7825H

7826H~7828H

7829H~782BH

782CH~782EH

782FH~7831H

7832H~7834H

7835H~7837H

7838H~783AH

783BH~783DH

783EH~7840H

Error Code(default)

Season Setting

0: the setting of parameter is correct;

1: tariff setting error;

2: schedule setting error;

4: segment setting error;

8: season setting error;

16: parameter of season setting error

32: holiday setting error;

64: parameter of holiday setting error;

256: tariff of schedule setting error;

512: time of schedule setting error;

1024: period of schedule setting error;

048: period of weekend setting error;

4096: weekend setting error; data and Season table Of the

1 st

Season data and Season table Of the

2 nd

Season data and Season table Of the

3 rd

Season data and Season table Of the

4 th

Season data and Season table Of the

5 th

Season data and Season table Of the

6 th

Season data and Season table Of the

7 th

Season data and Season table Of the

8 th

Season data and Season tableOf the

9 th

Season data and Season tableOf the

10 th Season data and Season tableOf the

11 th

Season word word word word word word word word word word word

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

7841H~7843H

7844H~7846H

7847H~7849H

784AH~784CH

784DH~784FH

7850H~7852H

7853H~7855H

7856H~7858H

7859H~785BH

785CH~785EH

785FH~7861H

7862H~7864H

7865H~7867H

7868H~786AH

786BH~786DH

786EH~7897H data and Season tableOf the

12 th

Season

Schedule Setting

1 st Seagment and Tariff

Number of the 1 st

schedule

2 nd

Seagment and Tariff

Number of the 1 st schedule

3 rd

Seagment and Tariff

Number of the 1 st

schedule

4 th Seagment and Tariff

Number of the 1 st schedule

5 th

Seagment and Tariff

Number of the 1 st schedule

6 th

Seagment and Tariff

Number of the 1 st

schedule

7 th

Seagment and Tariff

Number of the 1 st

schedule

8 th

Seagmentand Tariff

Number of the 1 st schedule

9 th

Seagment and Tariff

Number of the 1 st

schedule

10 th

Seagment and Tariff

Number of the 1 st

schedule

11 th

Seagment and Tariff

Number of the 1

12 th st

schedule

Seagment and Tariff

Number of the 1

13 th

14 th

Seagment and Tariff

Number of the 1

Seagment and Tariff

Number of the 1

From 1 st to 14 schedule th st

schedule st schedule st

schedule

Segment and Tariff Number of the 2th

The same as

1 st schedule word word word word word word word word word word word word word word word word

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

293

294

7898H~78C1H

78C2H~78EBH

78ECH~7915H

7916H~793FH

7940H~7969H

796AH~7993H

7994H~79BDH

79BEH~79E7H

79E8H~7A11H

7A12H~7A3BH

7A3CH~7A65H

7A66H~7A8FH

From 1 st

to 14 th

Segment and Tariff Number of the 3 rd schedule

From 1 st to 14 th Segment and Tariff Number of the 4 th schedule

From 1 st

to 14 th

Segment and Tariff Number of the 5 th schedule

From 1 st

to 14 th

Segment and Tariff Number of the 6 th schedule

From 1 st

to 14 th

Segment and Tariff Number of the 7 th schedule

From 1 st

to 14 th

Segment and Tariff Number of the 8 th schedule

From 1 st to 14 th Segment and Tariff Number of the 9 th schedule

From 1 st

to 14 th

Segment

and Tariff Number of the 10 th schedule

From 1 st

to 14 th

Segment

and Tariff Number of the 11 th schedule

From 1 st

to 14 th

Segment

and Tariff Number of the 12 th schedule

From 1 st

to 14 th

Segment

and Tariff Number of the 13 th schedule

From 1 st

to 14

and Tariff Number of the 14 schedule th

Segment th

Holiday Setting

The same as

1 st

schedule

The same as

1 st schedule

The same as

1 st

schedule

The same as

1st schedule

The same as

1 st

schedule

The same as

1 st

schedule

The same as

1

The same as

1

1 st st

schedule

The same as

1

The same as

1 st st st

schedule

schedule

schedule

The same as

schedule

The same as

1 st

schedule word word word word word word word word word word word word

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

7A90H~7A92H

7A93H~7A95H

7A96H~7A98H

7A99H~7A9BH

7A9CH~7A9EH

7A9FH~7AA1H

7AA2H~7AA4H

7AA5H~7AA7H

7AA8H~7AAAH

7AABH~7AADH

7AAEH~7AB0H

7AB1H~7AB3H

7AB4H~7AB6H

7AB7H~7AB9H

7ABAH~7ABCH

7ABDH~7ABFH

7AC0H~7AC2H

7AC3H~7AC5H data and the schedule Of the

1 st

2 nd

holiday data and the schedule Of the

holiday data and the schedule Of the

3 rd

4 th

holiday data and the schedule Of the

holiday data and the schedule Of the

5 th

6 th

holiday data and the schedule Of the

holiday data and the schedule Of the

7 th

8 th

holiday data and the schedule Of the

holiday data and the schedule Of the

9 th

holiday data and the schedule Of the

10 th holiday data and the schedule Of the

11 th

12 th

holiday data and the schedule Of the

holiday data and the schedule Of the

13 th

14 th

holiday data and the schedule Of the

holiday data and the schedule Of the

15 th data and the schedule Of the

16 th

holiday

holiday data and the schedule Of the

17 th

holiday data and the schedule Of the

18 th

holiday

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W word word word word word word word word word word word word word word word word word word

295

296

7AC6H~7AC8H

7AC9H~7ACBH

7ACCH~7ACEH

7ACFH~7AD1H

7AD2H~7AD4H

7AD5H~7AD7H

7AD8H~7ADAH

7ADBH~7ADDH

7ADEH~7AE0H

7AE1H~7AE3H

7AE4H~7AE6H

7AE7H~7AE9H

7AEAH

7AEBH

7AECH data and the schedule Of the

19 th

holiday data and the schedule Of the

20 th

holiday data and the schedule Of the

21st holiday data and the schedule Of the

22 nd

holiday data and the schedule Of the

23 rd holiday data and the schedule Of the

24 th

holiday data and the schedule Of the

25 th

holiday data and the schedule Of the

26 th holiday data and the schedule Of the

27 th

holiday data and the schedule Of the

28 th

holiday data and the schedule Of the

29 th holiday data and the schedule Of the

30 th

holiday

Holiday setting enable

Start year holiday setting

End year holiday setting word word word word word word word word word word word word word word word

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

The address area include ten years holiday setting, Function: 03H Read 10H

Preset

Table 6-27 Data address of ten years holiday

The 1st year Holiday address Function: 03H Read 10H Preset

7B00H~7B02H

The 1 st holiday and schedule

(format: month /day /schedule) word

7B03H~7B05H

7B06H~7B08H

The 2 nd

holiday and schedule

The 3 rd holiday and schedule word word

7B09H~7B0BH

7B0CH~7B0EH

7B0FH~7B11H

7B12H~7B14H

The 4 th

holiday and schedule

The 5 th

holiday and schedule

The 6 th

The 7 th

holiday and schedule

holiday and schedule word word word word

7B15H~7B17H

7B18H~7B1AH

7B1BH~7B1DH

7B1EH~7B20H

7B21H~7B23H

7B24H~7B26H

7B27H~7B29H

7B2AH~7B2CH

7B2DH~7B2FH

7B30H~7B32H

7B33H~7B35H

7B36H~7B38H

7B39H~7B3BH

7B3CH~7B3EH

7B3FH~7B41H

7B42H~7B44H

7B45H~7B47H

7B48H~7B4AH

7B4BH~7B4DH

7B4EH~7B50H

7B51H~7B53H

7B54H~7B56H

The 8 th holiday and schedule

The 9 th

holiday and schedule

The 10 th

holiday and schedule

The 11 th

holiday and schedule

The 12 th holiday and schedule

The 13 th

holiday and schedule

The 14 th

holiday and schedule

The 15 th

holiday and schedule

The 16 th holiday and schedule

The 17 th

holiday and schedule

The 18 th

holiday and schedule

The 19 th

holiday and schedule

The 20 th holiday and schedule

The 21 st

holiday and schedule

The 22 nd

holiday and schedule

The 23 rd

holiday and schedule

The 24 th holiday and schedule

The 25 th

holiday and schedule

The 26 th

holiday and schedule

The 27 th

holiday and schedule

The 28 th holiday and schedule

The 29 th

holiday and schedule word word word word word word word word word word word word word word word word word word word word word word

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

297

298

7B57H~7B59H

7B5AH

7B5BH

The 30 th holiday and schedule

The 1 st

setting year word word

Holiday number of the 1 st

year word

The 2 nd

year Holiday address Function: 03H Read 10H Preset

7B5CH~7B5EH

7B5FH~7B61H

7B62H~7B64H

7B65H~7B67H

The 1 st holiday and schedule

(format: month /day /schedule)

The 2 nd

holiday and schedule

The 3 rd

The 4 th

holiday and schedule

holiday and schedule word word word word

7B68H~7B6AH

7B6BH~7B6DH

7B6EH~7B70H

7B71H~7B73H

7B74H~7B76H

7B77H~7B79H

7B7AH~7B7CH

7B7DH~7B7FH

7B80H~7B82H

7B83H~7B85H

7B86H~7B88H

7B89H~7B8BH

The 5 th

holiday and schedule

The 6 th

holiday and schedule

The 7 th

The 8 th

holiday and schedule

holiday and schedule

The 9 th

holiday and schedule

The 10 th

holiday and schedule

The 11 th

holiday and schedule

The 12 th holiday and schedule

The 13 th

holiday and schedule

The 14 th

holiday and schedule

The 15 th

holiday and schedule word word word word word word word word word word word word

7B8CH~7B8EH

7B8FH~7B91H

7B92H~7B94H

7B95H~7B97H

7B98H~7B9AH

7B9BH~7B9DH

7B9EH~7BA0H

7BA1H~7BA3H

7BA4H~7BA6H

7BA7H~7BA9H

7BAAH~7BACH

The 16 th holiday and schedule

The 17 th

holiday and schedule

The 18 th

holiday and schedule

The 19 th

holiday and schedule

The 20 th holiday and schedule

The 21 st

holiday and schedule

The 22 nd

holiday and schedule

The 23 rd

holiday and schedule

The 24 th holiday and schedule

The 25 th

holiday and schedule

The 26 th

holiday and schedule

The 27 th

holiday and schedule word word word word word word word word word word word

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

7BADH~7BAFH

7BB0H~7BB2H

The 28 th holiday and schedule

The 29 th

holiday and schedule word word

7BB3H~7BB5H

7BB6H

7BB7H

The 30 th

holiday and schedule

The 2 th

setting year

Holiday number of the 2 th year word word word

The 3 rd

year Holiday address Function: 03H Read 10H Preset

7BB8H~7BBAH

7BBBH~7BBDH

7BBEH~7BC0H

7BC1H~7BC3H

The 1 th holiday and schedule

(format: month /day /schedule)

The 2 nd

holiday and schedule

The 3 rd holiday and schedule

The 4 th

holiday and schedule word word word word

7BC4H~7BC6H

7BC7H~7BC9H

7BCAH~7BCCH

7BCDH~7BCFH

7BD0H~7BD2H

7BD3H~7BD5H

7BD6H~7BD8H

7BD9H~7BDBH

7BDCH~7BDEH

The 5 th

holiday and schedule

The 6 th

holiday and schedule

The 7 th holiday and schedule

The 8 th

holiday and schedule

The 9 th

holiday and schedule

The 10 th

The 11 th

holiday and schedule

holiday and schedule

The 12 th

holiday and schedule

The 13 th

holiday and schedule word word word word word word word word word

7BDFH~7BE1H

7BE2H~7BE4H

7BE5H~7BE7H

7BE8H~7BEAH

7BEBH~7BEDH

7BEEH~7BF0H

7BF1H~7BF3H

7BF4H~7BF6H

7BF7H~7BF9H

7BFAH~7BFCH

7BFDH~7BFFH

7C00H~7C02H

The 14 th

The 15 th

holiday and schedule

holiday and schedule

The 16 th

holiday and schedule

The 17 th

holiday and schedule

The 18 th

The 19 th

holiday and schedule

holiday and schedule

The 20 th

holiday and schedule

The 21 st

holiday and schedule

The 22

The 23 nd

holiday and schedule rd holiday and schedule

The 24 th

holiday and schedule

The 25 th

holiday and schedule word word word word word word word word word word word word

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

299

300

7C03H~7C05H

7C06H~7C08H

The 26 th holiday and schedule

The 27 th

holiday and schedule word word

7C09H~7C0BH

7C0CH~7C0EH

7C0FH~7C11H

7C12H

7C13H

The 28 th

holiday and schedule

The 29

The 30

The 3 rd th th

holiday and schedule

holiday and schedule

setting year word word word word

Holiday number of the 3 rd

year word

The 4 th

year Holiday address Function: 03H Read 10H Preset

7C14H~7C16H

7C17H~7C19H

7C1AH~7C1CH

7C1DH~7C1FH

7C20H~7C22H

7C23H~7C25H

7C26H~7C28H

7C29H~7C2BH

The 1 st holiday and schedule

(format: month /day /schedule)

The 2 nd

holiday and schedule

The 3 rd holiday and schedule

The 4 th

holiday and schedule

The 5 th

holiday and schedule

The 6 th

holiday and schedule

The 7 th holiday and schedule

The 8 th

holiday and schedule word word word word word word word word

7C2CH~7C2EH

7C2FH~7C31H

7C32H~7C34H

7C35H~7C37H

7C38H~7C3AH

7C3BH~7C3DH

7C3EH~7C40H

7C41H~7C43H

7C44H~7C46H

7C47H~7C49H

7C4AH~7C4CH

7C4DH~7C4FH

7C50H~7C52H

7C53H~7C55H

7C56H~7C58H

7C59H~7C5BH

The 9 th

holiday and schedule

The 10

The 11 th

holiday and schedule th holiday and schedule

The 12 th

holiday and schedule

The 13 th

holiday and schedule

The 14

The 15 th

holiday and schedule th holiday and schedule

The 16 th

holiday and schedule

The 17 th

holiday and schedule

The 18

The 19 th

holiday and schedule th holiday and schedule

The 20 th

holiday and schedule

The 21 st

holiday and schedule

The 22 nd

holiday and schedule

The 23 rd holiday and schedule

The 24 th

holiday and schedule word word word word word word word word word word word word word word word word

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

7C7FH~7C81H

7C82H~7C84H

7C85H~7C87H

7C88H~7C8AH

7C8BH~7C8DH

7C8EH~7C90H

7C91H~7C93H

7C94H~7C96H

7C97H~7C99H

7C9AH~7C9CH

7C9DH~7C9FH

7CA0H~7CA2H

7CA3H~7CA5H

7CA6H~7CA8H

7CA9H~7CABH

7CACH~7CAEH

7C5CH~7C5EH

7C5FH~7C61H

7C62H~7C64H

7C65H~7C67H

7C68H~7C6AH

7C6BH~7C6DH

7C6EH

The 25 th holiday and schedule

The 26 th

holiday and schedule

The 27 th

holiday and schedule

The 28

The 29 th

holiday and schedule th holiday and schedule

The 30 th

holiday and schedule

The 4 th

setting year word word word word word word word

7C6FH Holiday number of the 4th year word

The 5 th year Holiday address Function: 03H Read 10H Preset

7C70H~7C72H

7C73H~7C75H

The 1 st

holiday and schedule

(format: month /day /schedule)

The 2 nd holiday and schedule word word

7C76H~7C78H

7C79H~7C7BH

The 3 rd

holiday and schedule

The 4 th

holiday and schedule word word

7C7CH~7C7EH The 5 th

holiday and schedule

The 6 th

holiday and schedule

The 7 th holiday and schedule

The 8 th

holiday and schedule

The 9 th

holiday and schedule

The 10

The 11 th

holiday and schedule th holiday and schedule

The 12 th

holiday and schedule

The 13 th

holiday and schedule

The 14

The 15 th

holiday and schedule th holiday and schedule

The 16 th

holiday and schedule

The 17 th

holiday and schedule

The 18

The 19 th

holiday and schedule th holiday and schedule

The 20 th

holiday and schedule

The 21 st

holiday and schedule word word word word word word word word word word word word word word word word word

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

301

302

7CAFH~7CB1H

7CB2H~7CB4H

7CB5H~7CB7H

7CB8H~7CBAH

7CBBH~7CBDH

7CBEH~7CC0H

7CC1H~7CC3H

7CC4H~7CC6H

7CC7H~7CC9H

7CCAH

7CCBH

The 22 nd holiday and schedule

The 23

The 24 rd

holiday and schedule th

holiday and schedule

The 25

The 26

The 27 th

holiday and schedule th

holiday and schedule th

holiday and schedule th

holiday and schedule The 28

The 29

The 30

The 5 th

holiday and schedule th

holiday and schedule th setting year

Holiday number of the 5th year word word word word word word word word

The 6th year Holiday address Function: 03H Read 10H Preset

7CCCH~7CCEH

7CCFH~7CD1H

The 1 st

The 2 nd

holiday and schedule

(format: month /day /schedule)

holiday and schedule word word

7CD2H~7CD4H

7CD5H~7CD7H

The 3 rd

The 4 th

holiday and schedule

holiday and schedule word word

7CD8H~7CDAH

7CDBH~7CDDH

7CDEH~7CE0H

7CE1H~7CE3H

7CD4H~7CE6H

7CE7H~7CE9H

7CEAH~7CECH

7CEDH~7CEFH

7CF0H~7CF2H

7CF3H~7CF5H

The 5

The 6

The 7

The 8

The 9

The 10 th th th th th

holiday and schedule

holiday and schedule

holiday and schedule

holiday and schedule th

holiday and schedule

The 11

The 12

The 13

The 14 th

holiday and schedule th

holiday and schedule th

holiday and schedule th

holiday and schedule

holiday and schedule word word word word word word word word word word

7CF6H~7CF8H

7CF9H~7CFBH

7CFCH~7CFEH

7CFFH~7D01H

7D02H~7D04H

7D05H~7D07H

7D08H~7D0AH

The 15

The 16

The 17 th holiday and schedule th

holiday and schedule th

holiday and schedule th

holiday and schedule The 18

The 19

The 20

The 21 st th

holiday and schedule th

holiday and schedule

holiday and schedule word word word word word word word word word word

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

7D0BH~7DODH

7D0EH~7D10H

7D11H~7D13H

7D14H~7D16H

7D17H~7D19H

7D1AH~7D1CH

7D1DH~7D1FH

7D20H~7D22H

7D23H~7D25H

7D26H

7D27H

The 22 nd holiday and schedule

The 23 rd

holiday and schedule

The 24 th

holiday and schedule

The 25 th

holiday and schedule

The 26

The 27 th

holiday and schedule th

holiday and schedule

The 28 th

holiday and schedule

The 29 th

holiday and schedule

The 30

The 6 th th

holiday and schedule

setting year

Holiday number of the 6 th

year word word word word word word word word word word word

The 7th year Holiday address Function: 03H Read 10H Preset

7D28H~7D2AH

The 1 st

holiday and schedule

(format: month /day /schedule) word

7D2BH~7D2DH

7D2EH~7D30H

7D31H~7D33H

7D34H~7D36H

The 2 nd

holiday and schedule

The 3 rd

holiday and schedule

The 4 th holiday and schedule

The 5 th

holiday and schedule word word word word

7D37H~7D39H

7D3AH~7D3CH

7D3DH~7D3FH

7D40H~7D42H

The 6 th

holiday and schedule

The 7 th

holiday and schedule

The 8 th holiday and schedule

The 9 th

holiday and schedule word word word word

7D43H~7D45H

7D46H~7D48H

7D49H~7D4BH

7D4CH~7D4EH

7D4FH~7D51H

7D52H~7D54H

7D55H~7D57H

7D58H~7D5AH

7D5BH~7D5DH

7D5EH~7D60H

The 10 th

holiday and schedule

The 11

The 12 th

holiday and schedule th holiday and schedule

The 13 th

holiday and schedule

The 14 th

holiday and schedule

The 15

The 16 th

holiday and schedule th holiday and schedule

The 17 th

holiday and schedule

The 18 th

holiday and schedule

The 19 th

holiday and schedule word word word word word word word word word word

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

303

304

7D61H~7D63H

7D64H~7D66H

7D67H~7D69H

7D6AH~7D6CH

7D6DH~7D6FH

7D70H~7D72H

The 20 th holiday and schedule

The 21 st

holiday and schedule

The 22 nd

holiday and schedule

The 23 rd

The 24 th

holiday and schedule

holiday and schedule

The 25 th

holiday and schedule

The 26 th

holiday and schedule word word word word word word

7D73H~7D75H word

7D76H~7D78H

7D79H~7D7BH

7D7CH~7D7EH

The 27 th

The 28 th

holiday and schedule

holiday and schedule

The 29 th

holiday and schedule

The 30 th

holiday and schedule word word word

7D7FH~7D81H

7D82H

7D83H

The 7 th

setting year

Holiday number of the 7 th year word word

The 8 th

year Holiday address Function: 03H Read 10H Preset

7D84H~7D86H

7D87H~7D89H

The 1 st

holiday and schedule

(format: month /day /time table)

The 2 nd

holiday and schedule word word

7D8AH~7D8CH

7D8DH~7D8FH

7D90H~7D92H

7D93H~7D95H

The 3 rd

holiday and schedule

The 4 th

holiday and schedule

The 5 th

holiday and schedule

The 6 th holiday and schedule word word word word word

7D96H~7D98H

7D99H~7D9BH

7D9CH~7D9EH

7D9FH~7DA1H

7DA2H~7DA4H

7DA5H~7DA7H

7DA8H~7DAAH

7DABH~7DADH

The 7 th

holiday and schedule

The 8 th

holiday and schedule

The 9 th

holiday and schedule

The 10 th holiday and schedule

The 11 th

holiday and schedule

The 12 th

holiday and schedule

The 13

The 14 th

holiday and schedule th holiday and schedule word word word word word word word word

7DAEH~7DB0H

7DB1H~7DB3H

7DB4H~7DB6H

The 15 th

holiday and schedule

The 16 th

holiday and schedule

The 17 th

holiday and schedule word word word

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

7DB7H~7DB9H

7DBAH~7DBCH

The 18 th holiday and schedule

The 19 th

holiday and schedule word word

7DBDH~7DBFH

7DC0H~7DC2H

7DC3H~7DC5H

7DC6H~7DC8H

7DC9H~7DCBH

The 20 th

holiday and schedule

The 21 st

holiday and schedule

The 22 nd holiday and schedule

The 23 rd

holiday and schedule

The 24 th

holiday and schedule

The 25 th

holiday and schedule word word word word word

7DCCH~7DCEH

7DCFH~7DD1H

7DD2H~7DD4H

7DD5H~7DD7H

The 26 th holiday and schedule

The 27 th

holiday and schedule

The 28 th

holiday and schedule

The 29 th

holiday and schedule word word word word

7DD8H~7DDAH

7DDBH~7DDDH

7DDEH

7DDFH

The 30 th holiday and schedule

The 8 th

setting year word word word

Holiday number of the 8 th

year word

The 9 th

year Holiday address Function: 03H Read 10H Preset

7DE0H~7DE2H

7DE3H~7DE5H

7DE6H~7DE8H

7DE9H~7DEBH

7DECH~7DEEH

7DEFH~7DF1H

7DF2H~7DF4H

7DF5H~7DF7H

7DF8H~7DFAH

7DFBH~7DFDH

7DFEH~7E00H

7E01H~7E03H

7E04H~7E06H

7E07H~7E09H

7E0AH~7E0CH

The 1 st holiday and schedule

(format: month /day /schedule)

The 2 nd

holiday and schedule

The 3 rd holiday and schedule

The 4 th

holiday and schedule

The 5 th

holiday and schedule

The 6 th

The 7 th

holiday and schedule

holiday and schedule

The 8 th

holiday and schedule

The 9 th

holiday and schedule

The 10 th

holiday and schedule

The 11 th holiday and schedule

The 12 th

holiday and schedule

The 13 th

holiday and schedule

The 14 th

holiday and schedule

The 15 th holiday and schedule word word word word word word word word word word word word word word word

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

305

306

7E0DH~7E0FH

7E10H~7E12H

7E13H~7E15H

7E16H~7E18H

7E19H~7E1BH

7E1CH~7E1EH

7E1FH~7E21H

7E22H~7E24H

The 16 th

The 17 th

holiday and schedule

holiday and schedule

The 18 th

holiday and schedule

The 19 th

holiday and schedule

The 20 th

The 21 st

holiday and schedule

holiday and schedule

The 22 nd

holiday and schedule

The 23 rd

holiday and schedule

The 24 th

The 25 th

holiday and schedule

holiday and schedule word word word word word word word word

7E25H~7E27H

7E28H~7E2AH word word

7E2BH~7E2DH

7E2EH~7E30H

7E31H~7E33H

7E34H~7E36H

The 26 th

holiday and schedule

The 27 th

holiday and schedule

The 28

The 29 th th

holiday and schedule

holiday and schedule word word word word

7E37H~7E39H

7E3AH

7E3BH

The 30 th

holiday and schedule word

The 10

The 9 th

setting year word

Holiday number of the 9 th

year word th

year Holiday address Function: 03H Read 10H Preset

7E3CH~7E3EH

7E3FH~7E41H

7E42H~7E44H

7E45H~7E47H

7E48H~7E4AH

7E4BH~7E4DH

7E4EH~7E50H

7E51H~7E53H

7E54H~7E56H

7E57H~7E59H

7E5AH~7E5CH

7E5DH~7E5FH

7E60H~7E62H

The 1 st

holiday and schedule

(format: month /day /schedule)

The 2 nd holiday and schedule

The 3 rd

holiday and schedule

The 4 th

holiday and schedule

The 5 th

holiday and schedule

The 6 th holiday and schedule

The 7 th

holiday and schedule

The 8 th

holiday and schedule

The 9 th

holiday and schedule

The 10 th holiday and schedule

The 11 th

holiday and schedule

The 12 th

holiday and schedule

The 13 th

holiday and schedule word word word word word word word word word word word word word

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

7E63H~7E65H

7E66H~7E68H

7E69H~7E6BH

7E6CH~7E6EH

7E6FH~7E71H

7E72H~7E74H

7E75H~7E77H

7E78H~7E7AH

7E7BH~7E7DH

7E7EH~7E80H

7E81H~7E83H

7E84H~7E86H

7E87H~7E89H

7E8AH~7E8CH

7E8DH~7E8FH

7E90H~7E92H

7E93H~7E95H

7E96H

7E97H

Address

The 14 th holiday and schedule

The 15 th

holiday and schedule

The 16 th

holiday and schedule

The 17 th

The 18 th

holiday and schedule

holiday and schedule

The 19 th

holiday and schedule

The 20 th

holiday and schedule

The 21 st

holiday and schedule

The 22 nd holiday and schedule

The 23 rd

holiday and schedule

The 24 th

holiday and schedule

The 25 th

The 26 th

holiday and schedule

holiday and schedule

The 27 th

holiday and schedule

The 28 th

holiday and schedule

The 29 th

The 30 th

holiday and schedule

holiday and schedule

The 10 th

setting year

Holiday number of the 10 th

year

Table 6-28

Parameter

Data

Type

Property Range

8000H

Manual

Triggering

Waveform word R/W

0XAA:Enable;

0:Disable

8001H

DI Triggering —

AXM-11 word R/W bit1bit0: DI1; bit3bit2:

DI2; bit5bit4: DI3; bit7bit6: DI4; bit9bit8:

DI5; bit11bit10: DI6;

00: Disable;

01: From OFF to ON;

10: From ON to OFF;

11: Any DI state change; word word word word word word word word word word word word word word word word word word word

0

0

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

0

0

307

308

8002H

8003H

DI Triggering —

AXM-21

DI Triggering —

AXM-31 word word

8004H

8005H

8006H

8007H

8008H

8009H

800AH

800BH

800CH

Voltage Rated

Value

Voltage Sag

Triggering

Waveform

Voltage Sag

Threshold

Voltage Sag half cycle count

Voltage Swell

Triggering

Waveform

Voltage Swell

Threshold

Reserved

Current Rated

Value

Over-current

Triggering

Waveform word word word word word word word word word

800DH Over-current

Threshold word

800EH Clear Waveform word R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

Bit1bit0: DI7; bit3bit2

: DI8; bit5bit4: DI9; bit7bit6: DI10;

The same as above

Bit1bit0: DI11; bit3bit2 : DI12; bit5bit4: DI13; bit7bit6: DI14;

The same as above

50V – 400V or

50V – 690V (only in

3LL)

1: Enable;

0: Disable

0

0

400

0

20---100(%) 50

4-200 half cycles

1: Enable;

0: Disable

50---140(%)

10

0

100

5000

R/W

500—5000(mA)

1: Enable;

0: Disable 0

0

0

400

0

50

10

0

100

5000

0

R/W 50---150(%) 100 100

0X55 enable 0 0

800FH

Clear Power

Quality Event word R/W 0X55 enable 0 0

Note: In 3LL and 2LL ,voltage rated value is line voltage; in 3LN, 1LN and 1LL, voltage rated value is phase voltage.

Waveform Capture Data Retrieve Address

Waveform Capture includes timestamp, triggering condition, and waveform data.

Every group uses the same data format. Only one group of waveform is saved in the registers. When retrieving the waveform, firstly write 1-8 group number into

0X801FH, then read the registers after it to acquire waveform corresponding to the written group number.

The relationship between voltage waveform value and real value:

Real Value (Unit: V) = Waveform Value / 37.59105

The relationship between current waveform value and real value:

Real Value (Unit: A) = Waveform Value / 1683.153

When users select 333mV Voltage type CT,real Value(Unit :A) = Waveform

Value/15869.87.The voltage and current value obtained from the waveform are the PT or CT secondary side value.

Read: FC03, Preset: FC16. For more information, please refer to Chapter 4.7.

309

310

Address

8E00H

8E01H

8E02H

Parameter

Waveform

Group Number for Retrieving

Waveform group number

Waveform record window status

Table 6-29

Default Range

1~100

Note: When the value is smaller than or equal to newest waveform record group number, this value is valid.

Waveform number

0-121

0x0BH: window data is valid.

0xFF: window data is invalid.

0xAA: waveform record memory is clearing(data is invalid)

1~100

0: no record

Data type

Word

Word

Word

Word

Property

R/W

R/W

R

R 8E03H

8E04H~8E43H

Newest

Waveform

Group Number

Waveform record data retrieving window

-32768~ 32767 Word R

Power Quality Event Retrieve Address

Power quality event includes timestamp, triggering condition and related settings. Every group uses the same data format. Only 10 groups of data are saved in the registers. When retrieving the event data, its parameters must be correctly set in order to get correct information.

Read: FC03, Preset: FC16. For more information, please refer to Chapter 4.7.

Address

8CFDH

8CFEH

Table 6-30

Parameter Data Type Property

Newest Event

Group Number word R

Event for

Retrieving starting group number word R/W

Range

1—50000

0: No Data

1-50000

Note: only valid smaller or equal to Newest Event

Group Number

8CFFH

No.1 Event

8D00H

8D01H

8D02H

8D03H

8D04H

Timestamp

High Byte –

Year

Low Byte -

Month

Timestamp

High Byte –

Day

Low Byte -

Hour

Timestamp

High Byte –

Minute

Low Byte -

Second

Timestamp:

Millisecond

Voltage Sag or

Voltage Swell condition word word word word word

R

R

R

R

R

Time

Time

Time

Time

0: disabled

1: Voltage Sag

2: Voltage Swell

0

1

0

1

311

312

8D05H

8D06H

Rated Value

Threshold word word

8D07H

Half-Cycle

Count

8D08H-8D0

FH

8D10H-

8D17H

8D18H-

8D1FH

8D20H-

8D27H

8D28H-

8D2FH

No. 2 Event

No. 3 Event

No. 4 Event

No. 5 Event

No. 6 Event word word word word word word

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

50V – 400V or

50V – 690V (only in

3LL)

Voltage Sag: 20-

100 (%)

Voltage Swell: 50-

140 (%)

Voltage Sag Event:

4-200;

Voltage Swell

Event: 0

6.4 DNP3.0 Protocal Introduction

Structure Model

User Laver

Application Layer

Transport Layer

TH

User Data

AH User Data

APDU

APDU

TPDU

Link Layer

LH TPDU

Physical Layer

Figure 6-2 Each Layer of the relationship between the data unit

6.4.1 Overview

This document describes the DNP3.0 communications protocol employed by Acuvim II Series Power Meter. This protocol can be selected for the serial communication port which can consist of RS232/RS485. It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the DNP3.0 protocol and serial communications in general.

This DNP3.0 is a reduced set of the Distributed Network Protocol Version 3.00, and it gives enough functionality to get critical measurement from the Acuvim II

Series Power Meter. The DNP3.0 supports class0 object only. No event generation is supported .This DNP3.0 is always act as a slave device.

313

314

6.4.2 Physical Layer

The physical layer supported by DNP3.0 must transmit or receive data in serial mode. The data unit transferred will be 8 bits in length.

The port must be asynchronous half-duplex RS-485.

The data format supporting 8 bit data, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit, no parity.

The baud rate can be set to any supported value.

6.4.3 Data Link Layer

The Acuvim II Series Power Meter always acts as a Slave device .The device address can be set from 0 to 65534. The link layer comply with the stand FT3 frame format.

The fixed length user data field is behind the fixed head. The link layer supports

Reset Link, Reset User and Read Link Status. In order to ensure the stability of communication, it is recommended that you should better reset the link and reset the user before communicate with the Acuvim II Series Power Meter.

The function code supported as follows:

Reset Link ( 0X00 ), Reset User ( 0X01 ), Link Status ( 0X09 ).

FT3 Frame Format:

An FT3 frame is defined as a fixed length header block followed by optional data blocks. Each block has a 16-bit CRC appended to it. The header fields consist of 2 start octets, 1 octet length, 1 octet control, a destination address, a source address and a 16-bit CRC appended to it.

Start

0x05

Start

0x64 block 0 length control Destination

Address fix length head

Source

Address

CRC

Block 1

User

Data

CRC … User

Data

Block N

CRC body

6.4.4 Transport Layer

The pseudo-transport layer segments application layer messages into multiple data link frames. For each frame, it inserts a single byte function code that indicates if the data link frame is the first frame of the message, the last frame of a message, or both (for single frame messages). The function code also includes a rolling frame sequence number which increments with each frame and allows the receiving transport layer to detect dropped frames.

6.4.5 Application Layer

The Acuvim II Series Power Meter implementation supports a subset of the objects and application layer function codes. The Acuvim II Series Power Meter will neither accept nor send multiple fragment application layer messages. The

Acuvim II Series Power Meter’s fragment size is fixed at 2k bytes.

Each application layer fragment begins with an application layer header followed by one object header or object header and data combinations. The application layer header contains an application control code and an application function code. The application control code contains an indication if the fragment is one of a multi-fragment message, contains an indication if an application layer confirmation is requested for the fragment, contains an indication if the fragment was unsolicited, and contains a rolling application layer sequence number. The application layer sequence number allows the receiving application layer to detect fragments that are out of sequence, or dropped fragments.

In the Acuvim II Series Power Meter, the DNP3.0 supports the Read function , the

Direct Operate function and the Direct Operate Unconfirmed function.

The Read function ( 0X01 )

The read function is the basic code used for requesting data objects from an

Outstation. Here this function is used for reading the measurement data from

315

316 the Power Meter. Learning more about the measurement data, please refer to the

Data Address Table. In this function, the qualifier could be selected contain 0X00,

0X01, 0X06.

The qualifier 0X00 refers that there two bytes called Range followed by, one is the start address want to request, the second is the stop address, this Range would be from 0 to 255.

The qualifier 0X01 indicates that the followed Range there are four bytes, the first two is the Start Address want to be request, the last two is the Stop Address, the two bytes consist of two 8-bit binary number , the low byte first, that the address

Range would be from 0 to 65535.

The qualifier 0X06 means read All data from the object with its respective variations which would be list in the queue.

More about the message please see Message Layout, the detailed examples.

The Direct Operate function ( 0X05 )

The function is selects and sets or operates the specified outputs, the status of the control points will be responded. Here this function is intended for resetting the energy counters and the demand counters. These actions are mapped to

Objects 12 Variations 1, point 1 and point 2, there are seen as a control relay. The relay must be operated On in 0 millisecond , and released Off in 1 millisecond .The qualifiers 0X17 and 0X28 are supported for writing the energy reset and demand reset. The examples will be shown in Message Layout.

The Direct Operate function ( 0X06 )

The function is selects and sets or operates the specified outputs but do not send a response to the request. Here this function is intended for switching the DNP3.0 protocol to Modbus protocol using the same communication port. This switching

is seen as a control relay mapped into Object 12 Variation 1 and point 0 in the

Acuvim II series Power Meter. The relay must be operated with qualifier 0X17, code

3, count 0, with 0 millisecond On and 1millisecond Off. After sending the request the current communication port will be changed to the Modbus protocol only.

The example will be shown in the Message Layout.

6.4.6 Error Reply

When meet the can’t recognize request , the unknown Object ,the unknown variation ,the point unsupported , the unsupported function code , the unsupported qualifier ,the unsupported range , the buffer overflow or any other exception error , an error reply will be generate from the Acuvim II series Power

Meter to send to the requester station . The Internal Indicator field will reflect the type of error.

6.4.7 Profile

1) Device Function

Slave

2) Maximum Data Link Frame Size

Transmitted 292

Received 292

3) Maximum Application Fragment Size

Transmitted 2048

Received 2048

4) Transport Multi-Fragment

Supported

317

318

5) Data Link Layer Confirmation

Supported

6) Application Layer Confirmation

Supported

7) Application Layer Function

Request

Supported 0X01, Read

Qualifier, 0X00, 0X01, 0X06.

Response

Supported 129, Read Response

Qualifier, 0X00

Supported Error Internal Indicator Response

8) DATA OBJECT LIBRARY

a) ANALOG INPUT OBJECT 30

Variation: 3, 32-BIT ANALOG INPUT WITHOUT FLAG

Variation: 4, 16-BIT ANALOG INPUT WITHOUT FLAG

Variation 5, 32-BIT FLOAT WITH FLAG

b) COUNTER OBJECT DEFINITIONS 20

Variation: 5, 32-BIT COUNTER WITHOUT FLAG

c) ALTERNATE NUMERIC OBJECT 100

Object

30

Object

30

Object

30

Object

100

Object

20

Object

12

Variation: 1 SHORT FLOATING POINT

d) CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT BLOCK Object 12

Variation: 01, static digital output control

6.4.8 Data Address Table

Point Descriptions

The following tables describe the DNP3.0 data objects provided by the Acuvim II series Power Meter. The object, variation, and point numbers are specified for each parameter, as well as the application layer function codes which may be used to operate on the parameter.

Description:

Table 6-31

Variation

3

Variation

4

Variation

5

Variation

1

Variation

5

Variation

1

32-BIT ANALOG INPUT WITHOUT FLAG

16-BIT ANALOG INPUT WITHOUT FLAG

32-BIT FLOAT INPUT WITH FLAG

32-BIT FLOAT INPUT WITH FLAG

32-BIT COUNTER WITHOUT FLAG

CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT BLOCK

Address Table:

319

320

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

Object Point Variation

100 0 1

100

100

1

2

1

1

100

100

3

4

1

1

Name

Freq_rms

Ua_rms

Ub_rms

Uc_rms

Uvag_rms

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

9

10

11

12

7

8

5

6

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Uab_rms

Ubc_rms

Uca_rms

Ulag_rms

Ia_rms

Ib_rms

Ic_rms

Ivag_rms

In_rms

Pa_rms

Pb_rms

Pc_rms

P_rms

Qa_rms

Qb_rms

Qc_rms

Q_rms

Sa_rms

Sb_rms

Sc_rms

S_rms

PFa_rms

PFb_rms

Table 6-32

Format Range Multiplier Units

Float 1.0

Hz

Float

Float

1.0

1.0

V

V

Float

Float

1.0

1.0

V

V

Float

Float

Float

Float

Float

Float

Float

Float

Float

Float

Float

Float

Float

Float

Float

Float

Float

Float

Float

Float

Float

Float

Float

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

A

A

A

A

V

A

V

V

A

W

W

W

W var var var var

VA

VA

VA

VA

None

None

Descriptor

Frequency

Voltage A

Voltage B

Voltage C

Phrase Voltage

Avg

Voltage A-B

Voltage B-C

Voltage C-A

Line Voltage Avg

Current A

Current B

Current C

Current Average

Neutral Current

Pa

Pb

Pc

Total Active

Power

Qa

Qb

Qc

Total Reactive

Power

Sa

Sb

Sc

Total Apparent

Power

PFa

PFb

Object Point Variation

100

100

100

100

100

28

29

30

31

32

1

1

1

1

1

Name

PFc_rms

PF_rms

Unbl_u2

Unbl_i2

Rlc_val

Format

Float

Float

Float

Float

Float

Range Multiplier Units

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

None

None

None

None

None

100

100

100

100

100

100

33

34

35

36

37

38

1

1

1

1

1

1

P_dema

Q_dema

Float

Float

S_dema Float

Ia_Demand Float

Ib_Demand Float

Ic_Demand Float

Table 6-33

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

W var

VA

A

A

A

Object Point Variation

20 0 5

20

20

20

20

20

20

1

2

3

4

5

6

5

5

5

5

5

5

Name

Active_

Energy_IMP

Active_

Energy_EXP

Reactive_

Energy_IMP

Reactive_

Energy_EXP

Active_

Energy_TOTAL

Active_

Energy_NET

Reactive_

Energy_TOTAL

Format Range Multiplier Units

UINT32 0-999999999 0.1/0.001 W hr

UINT32 0-999999999 0.1/0.001 W hr

UINT32 0-999999999 0.1/0.001 var hr

UINT32 0-999999999 0.1/0.001 var hr

UINT32 0-999999999 0.1/0.001 W hr

UINT32 0-999999999 0.1/0.001 W hr

UINT32 0-999999999 0.1/0.001 var hr

Descriptor

Active_

Energy_IMP

Active_

Energy_EXP

Reactive_

Energy_IMP

Reactive_

Energy_EXP

Active_

Energy_TOTAL

Active_

Energy_NET

Reactive_

Energy_TOTAL

Descriptor

PFc

Total Power

Factor

Voltage

Imbalance

Current

Imbalance

Load

Characteristics

P Demand

Q Demand

S Demand

Ia Demand

Ib Demand

Ic Demand

321

322

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

29

30

31

32

25

26

27

28

33

34

35

36

21

22

23

24

17

18

19

20

13

14

15

16

9

10

11

12

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

Object Point Variation

20 7 5

20 8 5

Name

Reactive_

Energy_NET

Apprent_

Format Range Multiplier Units

UINT32 0-999999999 0.1/0.001 var hr

Energy

DI1Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

DI2Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

DI3Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

DI4Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

DI5Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

DI6Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

DI7Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

DI8Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

DI9Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

DI10Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

DI11Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

DI12Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

DI13Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

DI14Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

DI15Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

DI16Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

DI17Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

DI18Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

DI19Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

DI20Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

DI21Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

DI22Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

DI23Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

DI24Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

DI25Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

DI26Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

DI27Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

DI28Counts UINT32 0-4294967259

UINT32 0-999999999 0.1/0.001 VA hr

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

Energy

DI1Counts

DI2Counts

DI3Counts

DI4Counts

DI5Counts

DI6Counts

DI7Counts

DI8Counts

DI9Counts

None DI10Counts

None DI11Counts

None DI12Counts

None DI13Counts

None DI14Counts

None DI15Counts

None DI16Counts

None DI17Counts

None DI18Counts

None DI19Counts

None DI20Counts

None DI21Counts

None DI22Counts

None DI23Counts

None DI24Counts

None DI25Counts

None DI26Counts

None DI27Counts

None DI28Counts

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Descriptor

Reactive_

Energy_NET

Apprent_

Table 6-34

Object Point Variation Name Format

30 0 4 THD_V1 UINT16

Range

0-10000

Multiplier

0.01

Units

None

30

30

1

2

4

4

THD_V2 UINT16

THD_V3 UINT16

0-10000

0-10000

0.01

0.01

None

None

30

30

30

30

30

3

4

5

6

7

4

4

4

4

4

THD_V UINT16

THD_I1 UINT16

THD_I2 UINT16

THD_I3 UINT16

THD_I UINT16

0-10000

0-10000

0-10000

0-10000

0-10000

0.01

0.01

0.01

0.01

0.01

None

None

None

None

None

Table 6-35

Descriptor

THD_V1

THD_V2

THD_V3

THD_V

THD_I1

THD_I2

THD_I3

THD_I

Object Point Variation Name Format Range Multiplier Units

12 0 1 DNP_ None 1 1

Descriptor

None Responds to Function

MODBUS 6 (Direct Operate-No

Ack) , Qualifier Code

12 1 1 Reset_

Energy_

Counters

None 1 1

17x, Control Code 3,

Count 0, On 0 msec,

Off 1 msec ONLY

None Responds to Function

5 (Direct Operate)

12 2 1 None 1 1

Qualifier Code 17x or

28x, Control Code 3,

Count 0, On 0 msec,

Off 1 msec ONLY

None Responds to Function Reset_

Demand_

Counters

5 (Direct Operate)

Qualifier Code 17x or

28x, Control Code 3,

Count 0, On 0 msec,

Off 1 msec ONLY

323

324

6.4.9 DNP3.0 Message Layout

The following table is the abbreviation and explain.

Table 6-36

DestL

DestH

SorcL

SorcH

CrcL

CrcH x y

II1

II2

The destination address low byte

The destination address high byte

The source address low byte

The source address high byte

The Cyclic Redundancy Checksum low byte

The Cyclic Redundancy Checksum high byte

The transport layer data sequence num

The application layer data sequence num

The first byte of Internal Indicator

The second byte of Internal Indicator

Link Layer Frames:

Table 6-37

Reset Link:

64

64

05

05

C0

00

DestL DestH SorcL SorcH

SorcL SorcH DestL DestH

Request

Response

Reset User:

05

05

Request

Response

Link Status:

05

05

64

64

05

05

C1

00

CrcL

CrcL

DestL DestH SorcL SorcH CrcL

SorcL SorcH DestL DestH CrcL

Request

Response

05

05

64

64

05

05

C9

00

DestL DestH SorcL SorcH CrcL

SorcL SorcH DestL DestH CrcL

CrcH

CrcH

CrcH

CrcH

CrcH

CrcH

Application Layer Frames:

Reset Energy:

Reset Energy

Request

Response

Request

Response

Cx

00

10

05

Cx

01

05

Reset Energy

Request CrcH

00

Response CrcH

01

01

05

Cx

00

05

Cx

01

02

64

Cy

00

64

Cy

00

Cy

00

11

64

Cy

00

64

00

03

03

18

05

00

1A

81

00

81

01

12

1A

05

00

1C

II1

00

13

C4

0C

00

44

C4

0C

CrcL

44

II1

00

Table 6-38

04 05 06 07 08

DestL DestH SorcL SorcH

01 17 01 01

CrcH

SorcL

II2

00

SorcH

0C

Crcl

DestL

01

CrcH

DestH

17

DestL DestH SorcL SorcH

01 28 01 00

00

SorcL

Crcl

SorcH

CrcH

DestL DestH

II2

00

14

0C

00

15

01

00

16

28

CrcL

17

CrcL

01

CrcL

01

CrcH

18

09

CrcL

03

CrcL

01

00

00

00

00

00

00

01

00

00

00

Crcl

Crcl

CrcH

CrcH

Request

Response

CrcH

00

CrcH

00

03

01

00 00

00 03

00

00

00 00 Crcl CrcH

00 00 Crcl CrcH

325

326

Reset Energy

Request

Response

Request

Response

Cx

00

10

05

Cx

01

05

Reset Energy

Request CrcH

00

Response CrcH

02

01

05

Cx

00

05

Cx

01

02

64

Cy

00

64

Cy

00

Cy

00

11

64

Cy

00

64

00

03

03

18

05

00

1A

81

00

81

01

12

1A

05

00

1C

II1

00

13

C4

0C

00

44

C4

0C

CrcL

44

II1

00

Table 6-39

04 05 06 07 08

DestL DestH SorcL SorcH

01 17 01 01

CrcH

SorcL

II2

00

SorcH

0C

CrcL

DestL

01

CrcH

DestH

17

DestL DestH SorcL SorcH

01 28 01 00

00

SorcL

CrcL

SorcH

CrcH

DestL DestH

II2

00

14

0C

00

15

01

00

16

28

CrcL

17

CrcL

02

CrcL

01

CrcH

18

09

CrcL

03

CrcL

01

00

00

00

00

00

00

01

00

00

00

CrcL

CrcL

CrcH

CrcH

Request

Response

CrcH

00

CrcH

00

03

02

00 00

00 03

00

00

00 00 CrcL CrcH

00 00 CrcL CrcH

Switch to Modbus:

Request

Request

00

01

05

Cx

00

10

CrcH

00

02

64

Cy

00

11

00

03

18

06

00

12

00

Table 6-40

04

C4

0C

CrcL

13

05 06 07 08

DestL DestH SorcL SorcH

01

CrcH

17 01 00

14 15 16 17

00 00 01 00 CrcL

09

CrcL

03

18

CrcH

Request Data:

Qualifier 0X06:

01

Request Data 0X06

Request 05

Cx

Response 05

Cx

Data3

L

10

Request Data

Request CrcH

02

64

Cy

64

Cy

Data3

H

11

03

Table 6-41

04 05 06 07 08 09

0B

01

1F

81

Data4

L

12

C4

1E

44

II1

Data4

H

13

DestL DestH SorcL SorcH

04 06 CrcL CrcH

SorcL SorcH DestL DestH

II2 1E 04 00

Data5 Data5 Data6 Data6

L

14

H

15

L

16

H

17

CrcL

CrcL

00

Data7

L

18

Response CrcH

07

Data7

H

Data0

L

CrcL

Data0

H

CrcH

Data1

L

Data1

H

Data2

L

Data2

H

CrcL CrcH

327

Qualifier 0X00:

01

Request Data 0X00

Request

05

Response

Cx

05

Cx

Data4

1

Data7

2

10

Request Data

Request

Response

CrcH

CrcH

CrcH

07

02

64

Cy

64

Cy

Data4

2

Data7

3

11

Flag3

Flag6

03

0D

01

28

81

Data4

3

Data7

4

12

Table 6-42

04

C4

64

44

II1

Data4

4

CrcL

13

05

DestL

01

SorcL

II2

Flag5

CrcH

14

06

DestH

00

SorcH

64

Data5

1

15

07 08

SorcL

03

DestL

01

Data5

2

SorcH

07

DestH

00

Data5

3

16

Data6

1

Data3

1

Data6

2

Data3

2

Data6

3

Data3

3

Data6

4

Data3 Flag4

4

Flag7 Data7

1

17

CrcL

CrcL

09

CrcL

CrcL

CrcL

03

Data5

4

18

CrcH

CrcH

Qualifier 0X00:

328

01

Request Data 0X00

Request 05

Response

Cx

05

Cx

Data6

L

02

64

Cy

64

Cy

Data6

H

03

0D

01

28

81

Data7

L

C4

14

44

II1

Data7

H

Table 6-43

04 05

DestL

05

SorcL

II2

CrcL

06

DestH

00

SorcH

14

CrcH

07

SorcL

03

DestL

05

08

SorcH

07

DestH

00

09

CrcL

CrcL

CrcL

03

10

Request Data

Request

Response

CrcH

CrcH

CrcH

07

11 12 13 14 15 16

Data3

L

Data3

H

Data4

L

Data4

H

Data5

L

Data5

H

17

CrcL

18

CrcH

Qualifier 0X01:

01

Request Data

0X01

Request

05

Response

Cx

05

Cx

Data2

L

Data10

L

10

Request Data

Request

Response

CrcH

00

CrcH

00

02

64

Cy

64

Cy

Data2

H

Data10

H

11

CrcL

0A

03

0F

01

3D

81

Data3

L

CrcL

12

CrcH

Data6

H

Data7

L

Table 6-44

04

C4

14

44

II1

Data3

H

CrcH

13

05

DestL

05

SorcL

II2

Data4

L

14

00

Data7

H

Data0L Data0

Data8

L

H

Data8

H

06

DestH

01

SorcH

14

Data4

H

15

Data1

L

Data9

L

07

16

Data1

H

Data9

H

08

SorcL

00

DestL

05

Data5

L

SorcH

00

DestH

01

Data5

H

CrcL

0A

CrcL

00

Data6

L

17

CrcL

CrcL

09

18

CrcH

CrcH

329

330

Error Reply:

Error Reply

Response 05

Cx

64

Cy

0A

81

44

II1

DestL DestH SorcL SorcH CrcL

II2 CrcL CrcH

CrcH

Appendix

Appendix A Technical Data and Specifications

Appendix B Ordering Information

Appendix C Revision History

331

Appendix A Technical data and Specification

Input ratings

Energy Accuracy (Acuvim IIR)

Active power

(according to IEC 62053-22)

(according to ANSI C12.20)

Reactive

(according to IEC 62053-23)

Harmonic Resolution

Metered Value

Class 0.2S

Class 0.2

Class 2

2 nd ~ 63 rd

Voltage input

Withstand 1500Vac continuous

3250Vac, for minute

332

Current Inputs (Each Channel)

Current A

20Arms

100Arms non-recurring

Burden

Accuracy 0.2% full scale

Accuracy

Parameters

Voltage

Current

Power

Reactive Power

Apparent Power

Power Demand

Reactive Power Demand

Apparent Power Demand

Power Factor

Frequency

Energy

Reactive

Energy

Apparent

Energy

Primary

Secondary

Primary

Secondary

Primary

Secondary

Harmonics

Phase Angle

Imbalance Factor

Running Time

Temperature Drift

Accuracy

0.2%

0.2%

0.2%

0.2%

0.2%

0.2%

0.2%

0.2%

0.2%

0.2%

0.2%

0.2%

0.2%

0.2%

0.2%

0.2%

1.0%

2.0%

2.0%

<1second/ day

<100ppm/°C

0.5‰/year

Resolution

0.1V

0.001A

1W

1Var

1VA

1W

1Var

1VA

0.001

0.01Hz

0.1kWh

0.001kWh

0.1kvarh

0.001kvarh

0.1kVAh

0.001kVAh

0.1%

0.1°

0.1%

0.01h

Control power

AC/DC Control Power

Operating Range

Burden

100-415Vac, 50/60Hz; 100-300Vdc

5W

Range

20V~1000kV

5mA~50000A

-9999MW~9999MW

-9999MVar~9999MVar

0~9999MVA

-9999MW~9999MW

-9999MVar~9999MVar

0~9999MVA

-1.000~1.000

45.00~65.00Hz

0~99999999.9kWh

0~999999.999kWh

0~99999999.9kvarh

0~999999.999kvarh

0~99999999.9kVAh

0~999999.999kVAh

>=0.0%

0.0°~359.9°

>=0.0%

0~9999999.99h

333

334

Withstand 3250Vac, 50/60Hz 1min

Installation Category III (Distribution)

Low Voltage DC Control Power (Optional)

Operating Range 20-60Vdc

Burden 5W

I/O Option

Digital Input

Input Voltage Range

Input Current (Max)

Start Voltage

Stop Voltage

20-160Vac/dc

2mA

15V

5V

Pulse Frequency (Max)

SOE Resolution

100Hz, 50% Duty Ratio

2ms

Digital Output (DO) (Photo-MOS)

Voltage Range 0-250Vac/dc

Load Current

Output Frequency

Isolation Voltage

Relay Output (RO)

Switching Voltage (Max)

Load Current

Set Time

Contact Resistance

Isolation Voltage

Mechanical Life

Analog Output (AO)

Output Range

Accuracy

Temperature Drift

100mA(Max)

25Hz, 50% Duty Ratio

2500Vac

250Vac,30Vdc

5A(R), 2A(L)

10ms (Max)

30mΩ(Max)

2500Vac

1.5×10

7

0-5V/1-5V, 0-20mA/4-20mA(Optional)

0.5%

50ppm/°C typical

Isolation Voltage

Open Circuit Voltage

Analog Input (AI)

Input Range

Accuracy

Temperature Drift

Isolation Voltage

Power Supply for DI (24Vdc)

Output Voltage

Output Current

Load (Max)

500Vdc

15V

0-5V/1-5V, 0-20mA/4-20mA (Optional)

0.2%

50ppm/°C typical

500Vdc

24Vdc

42mA

21DIs

Suitable Conditions

Dimensions (mm)

Protection Level

Weight (g)

Temperature

Humidity

Power Supply

Power Consumption

96x96x51

(Cut-out 92x92 or 4-inch Round)

IP54 (Front), IP30 (Cover)

350g

-25°C~70°C, Metering

-40°C~85°C, Storage

5%~95% Non-condensing

100-415Vac, 50/60Hz; 100-300Vdc

Category III, Pollution degree 2

5W

Standard Compliance

Measurement Standard

Environmental Standard

Safety Standard

EMC Standard

Outlines Standard

IEC 62053-22; ANSI C12.20

IEC 60068-2

IEC 61010-1, UL 61010-1

IEC 61000-4/-2-3-4-5-6-8-11, CISPR 22

DIN 43700, ANSI C39.1

335

336

Communication

RS-485 (Standard)

Ethernet (Optional)

PROFI-BUS (Optional)

RS-485 (Optional):

BACnet MS/TP(Optional)

BACnet IP(Optional)

2-wire connection

MODBUS RTU Protocol or DNP3.0 Protocol

Up to 38400 baud rate

10M/100M BaseT

MODBUS TCP/IP Protocol

Data Browsing through HTTP

Sends e-mail automatically

PROFIBUS-DP/V0 Protocol

Work as PROFIBUS slave, baud rate adaptive, up to 12M

Typical input bytes: 32, typical output bytes: 32

PROFIBUS standard according to EN 50170 vol.2

2-wire connection

MODBUS RTU Protocol

Up to 38400 baud rate

2-wire connection

BACnet Protocol

RJ45

BACnet Protocol

Appendix B Ordering Information

Acuvim II series meter:

DIN Rail Option Frequency Current Input Power Supply

Acuvim II

P1: 100-415Vac, 50/60Hz

100-300Vdc

P2: 20-60Vdc

5A: 5Amp

1A: 1Amp

333mv: (Voltage type)

Acuvim II

Acuvim IIR

Acuvim IIE

Acuvim IIW

50: 50Hz

60: 60Hz

D: Standard with LCD display

M: DIN rail mount (no LCD)

Acuvim II Base Meter Ordering Example: Acuvim IIR - D - 60 - 5A - P1

I/O Option module

AXM-IO1

Module 1

1

Module 2

2

337

AXM-IO2

AXM-IO3

Module 1

1

Analog Output Type

Module 2

2

Analog Output Type

Module 1

1

Module 2

2

Analog Input Type

Analog Input Type

A: 4-20mA

B: 0-20mA

C: 1-5V

D: 0-5V

A: 4-20mA

B: 0-20mA

C: 1-5V

D: 0-5V

A: 4-20mA

B: 0-20mA

C: 1-5V

D: 0-5V

A: 4-20mA

B: 0-20mA

C: 1-5V

D: 0-5V

IO Module Ordering Example: AXM-IO2-1A

Remote Display Option

REM-

DS2: Compatible with Acuvim II Series “M” (DIN Mount) models only

338

Communication Option Module

AXM-

NET: Ethernet Module (AXM-NET)

PROFI: Profibus Module (AXM-PROFI)

RS485: Modbus®-RTU (AXM-RS485)

Note:

1. No more than 2 of the same I/O modules may be attached to the meter (example: 2 AXM-IO2). The same two I/O modules must be a different component number.

2. A maximum of 3 modules may be attached to the meter. If a communication module is used (example: AXM-NET), it must be installed on the back of the meter FIRST before the other modules are attached.

3. If you select Acuvim IIW products, and prepared to use DI recorder function, then select the IO module can only select logic number 1module.

339

Appendix C Revision History

340

1.2

1.50

1.51

1.52

1.53

1.21

1.22

1.23

1.30

1.40

1.60

1.61

1.62

Revision

1.0

1.1

Date

20070915

20070930

20071016

20080303

20080625

20080710

20080912

20090305

20090520

20090626

20090818

20090909

20100930

20101122

20110228

Description

First version

P47: change the flow chart;

P86: change value of address 101dH from "Reserved" to

"Basic parameter mode";

P93: change the description of "Basic analog measurement";

P101~P102: change the description "Counting number of

I/O modules".

P50: change the flow chart; add the function: AO transforming parameters setting via the front panel.

Change the AO mode, see IO Module User’s Manual; P64,

P69, P89: Add 3 demand parameters for alarm.

Add transforming data type.

Change the ordering information.

Change the type of AO and AI to be read only.

Open the address of AO/AI type set; add current demand, maximum current demand and current demand alarm.

Add Acuvim IIR

Change the content

Change the content

P121: Add "Data logging operation examples"; Change the content of chapter 4 and 5.

Add Acuvim IIE functions; Add User's Manual of the accessory modules (IO Modules, Ethernet Module, Profibus

Module)

Change the maximum Data-Logging sectors from 64 to 63.

In the chapter of Tou (6.3.8), add the address of the max of demand and DST.

Change DI input voltage range, Change AD output address.

Revision

1.63

1.64

1.65

2.01

2.02

Date

20120417

20120724

20120913

20130621

20140214

Description

Change" Time of use (TOU)" Increase in" Acuvim IIW ".

Update the method for generating CRC value;

Change the voltage rated value and voltage swell threshold.

Change the Weekend Setting in TOU.

Add the parameter setting page and BACnet parameter setting page; Data logging Record mode description;

Waveform recording function; Sealing function;

AO function; Voltage wiring; Harmonic content rate range;

Net electric range; Clear alarm directives; Update the webpage browsing and parameter settings, and add the

SNMP and SNTP function.

Add DNP3.0 and BACnet Protocol Introduction.

341

Your Power and Automation Partner

Accuenergy Corporation

Los Angeles-Toronto-Beijing

North America Toll Free: 1-877-721-8908

Web: www.accuenergy.com

Email: [email protected]

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals